This is only a preview of the December 2025 issue of Silicon Chip. You can view 35 of the 104 pages in the full issue, including the advertisments. For full access, purchase the issue for $10.00 or subscribe for access to the latest issues. Articles in this series:
Articles in this series:
Items relevant to "RGB LED Star Ornament":
Items relevant to "Earth Radio, Part 1":
Items relevant to "DCC Decoder":
Items relevant to "Digital Preamplifier, Part 3":
Purchase a printed copy of this issue for $14.00. |
DECEMBER 2025
ISSN 1030-2662
12
9 771030 266001
$
00* NZ $14 90
The VERY BEST DIY Projects!
14
INC GST
INC GST
RGB
LED Star
Pre-assembled and ready to decorate in time for Christmas
How to design your own PCBs
All the steps needed to make and order your own printed circuit boards
DCC Decoder
for model locomotives
HUMANOID
ROBOTS
Portable Fridge/Freezer
SALE
ON SALE Thursday 4 Dec to Wednesday 24 Dec, 2025
40
*
ENDS DEC 24
Whilst Stock Lasts
*Selected Models
Contents
Vol.38, No.12
December 2025
16 Humanoid Robots, Part 2
Humanoid and android robots are now a reality; while they’re not yet
perfect, they are becoming more widespread. So let’s look at some of the
most interesting robots of the past and present.
By Dr David Maddison, VK3DSM
Robotics
DCC Decoder
for model locomotives
30 Power Electronics, Part 2
In this series of articles, we explore the broad term of power electronics.
Part two continues the series by covering the control systems required to
make DC-DC converters work.
By Andrew Levido
Electronic design
Page 70
Earth Radio
52 How to Design PCBs, Part 1
PCB fabrication is inexpensive nowadays, with plenty of scope for
customisation. To help you take advantage of this, we show you the entire
process of designing and ordering your own PCBs from scratch.
By Tim Blythman
Making your own PCBs
Page 60
96 BC-211 Frequency Meter
The BC-211 is one of a family of frequency meters that were designed for
military use by the USA around 1940. It needed to remain accurate even for
use in the field, so how did they do it?
By Ian Batty
Vintage Electronics
41 RGB LED Star Ornament
Jazz up your Christmas tree or anywhere around the house using this Star
with its 80 RGB LEDs and pre-programmed patterns. It is also sold partially
pre-assembled, with only a small amount of soldering required.
By Nicholas Vinen
Christmas decoration project
60 Earth Radio, Part 1
Solar and atmospheric disturbances, like storms or auroras, can be heard
using this ‘natural’ radio receiver. It is battery-powered and utilises a
portable loop antenna, so you can use it from nearly anywhere.
By John Clarke
Scientific / radio receiver project
70 DCC Decoder
A DCC Decoder is essential for controlling every model train. This project is
the first in a series covering all parts of a complete DCC (digital command
control) system. The later parts explain you how to use DCC, build a Base
Station, Remote Controller, Booster and Reverse Loop Controller.
Part 1 by Tim Blythman
Model train project
82 Digital Preamplifier, Part 3
This advanced preamplifier uses digital processing and can also act as
a crossover. In the final part of this series, we explain how to prepare the
case, mount the modules, wire it up and play some music.
By Phil Prosser
Audio/hifi project
Part 3: Page 82
Digital
Preamplifier
and Crossover
2
Editorial Viewpoint
4
Mailbag
10
Product Showcase
15
Online Shop
79
Circuit Notebook
90
Serviceman’s Log
102
Ask Silicon Chip
103
Market Centre
104
Advertising Index
104
Notes & Errata
1. Pulse-counting logic probe
2. 10A ammeter using a digital voltmeter
SILICON
SILIC
CHIP
www.siliconchip.com.au
Publisher/Editor
Nicholas Vinen
Technical Editor
John Clarke – B.E.(Elec.)
Technical Staff
Bao Smith – B.Sc.
Tim Blythman – B.E., B.Sc.
Advertising Enquiries
(02) 9939 3295
adverts<at>siliconchip.com.au
Regular Contributors
Allan Linton-Smith
Dave Thompson
David Maddison – B.App.Sc. (Hons 1),
PhD, Grad.Dip.Entr.Innov.
Geoff Graham
Associate Professor Graham Parslow
Dr Hugo Holden – B.H.B, MB.ChB.,
FRANZCO
Ian Batty – M.Ed.
Phil Prosser – B.Sc., B.E.(Elec.)
Cartoonist
Louis Decrevel
loueee.com
Founding Editor (retired)
Leo Simpson – B.Bus., FAICD
Silicon Chip is published 12 times
a year by Silicon Chip Publications
Pty Ltd. ACN 626 922 870. ABN 20
880 526 923. All material is copyright ©. No part of this publication
may be reproduced without the written
consent of the publisher.
Subscription rates (Australia only)
6 issues (6 months): $72.50
12 issues (1 year):
$135
24 issues (2 years):
$255
Online subscription (Worldwide)
6 issues (6 months): $52.50
12 issues (1 year):
$100
24 issues (2 years):
$190
For overseas rates, see our website or
email silicon<at>siliconchip.com.au
* recommended & maximum price only
Postal address: PO Box 194,
Matraville, NSW 2036.
Phone: (02) 9939 3295.
ISSN: 1030-2662
Printing and Distribution:
14 Hardner Rd, Mount Waverley VIC 3149
54 Park St, Sydney NSW 2000
2
Silicon Chip
Editorial Viewpoint
Dutch government fumbles with
Nexperia
In case you’re not aware, NXP Semiconductors, a
major manufacturer of microcontrollers and other ICs,
was spun off from Dutch electronics giant Philips in
2006. In 2015, NXP acquired Freescale Semiconductor, becoming one of the world’s largest automotive
chipmakers.
In 2017, NXP spun off its Standard Products division as a new company, Nexperia, which focuses on discrete semiconductors, logic devices and Mosfets. Nexperia was soon acquired by Chinese
semiconductor firm Wingtech.
Recently, the US Department of Commerce pressured the Dutch government to intervene in Nexperia due to concerns over its Chinese ownership.
While Nexperia’s product line isn’t particularly sensitive, its enormous production volume and deep integration into global supply chains make it strategically important.
The US demanded the removal of Nexperia’s Chinese CEO, Zhang Xuezheng, and threatened to restrict imports of Nexperia products if this didn’t
happen.
The Dutch government capitulated under this pressure and, on the 30th
of September 2025, invoked their Goods Availability Act for the first time to
intervene (see siliconchip.au/link/ac93), citing “serious governance shortcomings” and risks to the continuity of European semiconductor manufacturing. A Dutch court suspended the CEO and appointed a local director
with decisive voting rights.
The government claimed this would not affect day-to-day operations, but
major decisions, like asset sales or leadership changes, could now be blocked
or reversed by the Minister for Economic Affairs.
Predictably, this has sparked internal disruption, and it seems the move
may be backfiring. Nexperia’s Chinese operations have reportedly instructed
staff to ignore directives from Dutch headquarters, creating a serious risk of
fragmentation.
Should China retaliate – for instance, by seizing control of Nexperia’s assets
within China – the European side of the business would be left severely weakened. About 80% of Nexperia’s chips are assembled and tested in China,
especially at its massive Guangdong facility, which handles over 50 billion
units annually.
While the situation continues to evolve, it highlights the fragility of international supply chains in a geopolitically tense world. I’m hoping, for everyone’s sake, that this volatile situation can be resolved and Nexperia can continue their production as normal.
Ironically, in trying to safeguard European technological sovereignty, the
Dutch government may have made its own semiconductor sector more vulnerable. Even if the US had cut Nexperia out of its domestic market, the
fallout would likely have been more manageable. That scenario might have
even shifted more production toward Europe – not less, as now seems likely.
Nexperia’s products are humble yet critical: logic gates, diodes, Mosfets;
the basic building blocks found in almost every piece of electronic hardware. Their strategic value comes not from cutting-edge tech, but from sheer
scale and ubiquity.
The current situation is a reminder that just about any large business can
be at geopolitical risk. For engineers and supply managers alike, it reinforces
the need to diversify sourcing and keep an eye not just on the price per unit,
but on whether all the eggs are in one basket.
by Nicholas Vinen
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
MAILBAG
your feedback
Letters and emails should contain complete name, address and daytime phone number. Letters to the Editor are submitted on the condition that
Silicon Chip Publications Pty Ltd has the right to edit, reproduce in electronic form, and communicate these letters. This also applies to submissions to “Ask Silicon Chip”, “Circuit Notebook” and “Serviceman’s Log”.
How to avoid losing SMD parts
In a moment of dubious reasoning, I ordered two kits from
Silicon Chip, both with numerous, almost invisible SMD
components. Previous experience with these tiny components showed how easily they
can fly off my workbench and
vanish forever on my relatively
clean floor.
Thinking of how to prevent
this inevitability, I remembered what an old jeweller had
used to prevent watch parts
from being lost. He donned a special apron that hung from
his neck as normal but then curled up and clipped under
his bench. Anything that might try to escape onto the floor
was caught in the apron with a good chance of being found.
So I made one, as shown in the attached photo. Imagine
yourself between the chair and the apron. Happy making!
Stephen Somogyi, Gloucester, NSW.
Comment: if you need a name for it, we propose the “SMD
bib”. And if you lose anything after wearing the bib, you
can then spit the dummy.
Feedback on USB-C Power Monitor & SMDs
Following up from an October letter you published titled
“Overcoming challenges in assembling several modules”,
I found several similarities
to my efforts with the USB
tester, identifying tiny components being the major one.
I too found solder bridges,
which I cleared with some
solder wick.
My project was all hand
soldered, no re-flow equipment being available. Maybe
it is a reflection on your readership but I am also in the
75+ age group. My tester is working perfectly and it calibrated easily.
Ian Malcolm, Scoresby, Vic.
Capacitors may act as grid leak resistors
I am writing regarding the Reinartz TRF Receiver article
(Reinartz 2 TRF Receiver by Philip Fitzherbert & Ian Batty,
October 2025; siliconchip.au/Article/18996) and the question on page 95 to do with the absence of a grid leak resistor.
I have only ever made one Reinartz-style receiver, and
4
Silicon Chip
it was featured in the October 2021 issue of Silicon Chip.
In that radio, I eventually wound up with a pentode as
the reaction valve, having trialled triode and tetrode ideas
extensively.
While I was experimenting with valve types, I basically
carried over the same grid leak parts. These were 1930s
style: a big 250pF moulded capacitor and a 2.5MW ceramic
lead end-cap resistor. At some point while experimenting,
I unknowingly disconnected the resistor but did not notice
as the valves were still biased OK. Then I had to change
the capacitor because one brittle lead broke.
After that, whatever valve I was trying did not work
‘properly’, seemingly choking up bias-wise. After much
confusion, I fixed the broken wire on the old cap, swapped
that back in, and all was well again.
The reason was that the old capacitor had leakage in
the megohms range. It was thus acting as a grid-leak bias
resistor. In the final build, I used a very low-leakage mica
moulded cap and mounted the 2.5MW resistor across the
cap instead of being grid to ground. That proved the point;
it biases just as well.
I wonder if the capacitors of the day simply had enough
leakage to behave this way, and Reinartz knew exactly what
he was doing without saying so.
On a general note, I was very impressed with how well
the Reinartz ‘reaction’ theory worked on my set. Without
the feedback loops, the sensitivity was poor and the selectivity bad, with stations overlapping each other. By introducing the tuning coil feedback, as well as the screen grid
gain adjustment, the set then had sensitivity and selectivity almost like a superhet receiver.
It was very impressive and spurred me on to produce a
whole receiver, as you see in the 2021 article.
Fred Lever, Toongabbie, NSW.
Adding a weather station to HomeAssistant
I would like to congratulate you on the articles on Home
Assistant (September & October 2025; siliconchip.au/
Series/448). I’ve been running a very basic instance of HA
on an Intel NUC for a couple of years now, so it was interesting to read your take on it.
I currently have a Z-Wave integration and use it to drive
an IR Blaster for my air conditioning system, as well as get
feedback from a couple of temperature probes. One thing
I’d like to see is an integration for a weather station; temperature and rain sensing is all I really want. Wind speed
and direction are very unreliable unless the unit is mounted
in the right place and the hardware is more complicated.
I have seen some designs using a tipping-bucket rain
gauge with an I2C or UART interface to Arduino and
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
Introducing ATEM Mini Pro
The compact television studio that lets you
create presentation videos and live streams!
Now you don’t need to use a webcam for important presentations
or workshops. ATEM Mini is a tiny video switcher that’s similar to
the professional gear broadcasters use to create television shows!
Simply plug in multiple cameras and a computer for your slides,
then cut between them at the push of a button! It even has a built
in streaming engine for live streaming to YouTube!
Live Stream to a Global Audience!
Easy to Learn and Use!
Includes Free ATEM Software Control Panel
There’s never been a solution that’s professional but also easy to use. Simply press
ATEM Mini is a full broadcast television switcher, so it has hidden power that’s
any of the input buttons on the front panel to cut between video sources. You can
unlocked using the free ATEM Software Control app. This means if you want to
select from exciting transitions such as dissolve, or more dramatic effects such
go further, you can start using features such as chroma keying for green screens,
as dip to color, DVE squeeze and DVE push. You can even add a DVE for picture
media players for graphics and the multiview for monitoring all cameras on a
in picture effects with customized graphics.
single monitor. There’s even a professional audio mixer!
Use Any Software that Supports a USB Webcam!
You can use any video software with ATEM Mini Pro because the USB connection
will emulate a webcam! That guarantees full compatibility with any video software
and in full resolution 1080HD quality. Imagine giving a presentation on your
latest research from a laboratory to software such as Zoom, Microsoft Teams,
ATEM Mini Pro has a built in hardware streaming engine for live streaming to
a global audience! That means you can live stream lectures or educational
workshops direct to scientists all over the world in better video quality with
smoother motion. Streaming uses the Ethernet connection to the internet, or
you can even connect a smartphone to use mobile data!
ATEM Mini Pro
$505
Skype or WebEx!
www.blackmagicdesign.com/au
Learn More!
Raspberry Pi, but the coding is beyond me. Would you look
at incorporating the rain sensor into your ESPHome hub?
You can buy the tipping bucket sensor with an interface
board from Core Electronics SEN0575.
They also sell an interesting ESP32 board that has built-in
solar charging capabilities for powering this somewhere in
your garden. I’d like to have your thoughts on possibly using
this board to terminate the rain sensor and the interface
to HA via WiFi or Zigbee. See Core Electronics DFR1075.
Duncan Wilkie, Hobart, Tas.
Richard Palmer responds: Good to hear that you enjoyed
the Home Assistant series. A weather station would make
an excellent addition to a home installation.
Temperature and humidity sensing are straightforward
as there are a substantial number of I2C devices that fit the
bill, including the SHT40 used in the project. A few metres
of cable shouldn’t upset the I2C connection. If it does, reducing the I2C frequency in the configuration file should do
the trick. ESP Home supports frequencies down to 10kHz.
The rain gauge is a little more complex. The Core Electronics DFROBOT Tipping Bucket Rainfall Sensor is an
excellent solution in theory. However, to integrate it with
ESPHome, the software library (in Python) would need to
be converted into an ESPHome-compatible format, which
would be a mid-level task for someone with solid programming skills.
The ESPHome Developer Site (https://developers.
esphome.io) provides further information. As for the Firebeetle, any platform that has I2C support is theoretically
a candidate.
Another approach would be to use the ESPHome UART
Bus (https://esphome.io/components/uart) for the interface.
The documentation is clear for writing to the serial interface,
but somewhat lacking on how to process incoming data.
I found a discussion on the HA forum (https://community.
home-assistant.io/t/get-data-from-serial-port/799877/7)
that offers an approach to processing incoming serial
data. I hope this helps in your quest for a HA-integrated
weather station.
Testing infrared remote controls
Regarding the query by M. S. of Melbourne, Victoria, in
the October 2025 edition of Silicon Chip magazine on page
104, there is a simple, convenient method of testing infrared remote controls. All that is required is a mobile phone
with a camera facility.
Open up the camera app on the phone and point the
remote at the camera lens. Pressing any button on the remote
will cause it to emit a beam of IR pulses that can be seen
on the phone screen, since phone cameras are sensitive to
IR as well as normal visible light. The response from the
remote will be a white flickering glow from the IR LED,
easily visible on the camera.
Keep up the great work with this magazine.
Keith Gooley, VK5OQ, One Tree Hill, SA.
File synchronisation problems with OneDrive
I’ve noticed that the editors of Silicon Chip sometimes
make unkind remarks about Windows 11. I’ve also noticed
recently that this magazine publishes amazingly thorough
and informative articles about modern technologies only
indirectly related to silicon chips. The latest example has
been drones. Well done, and thanks.
6
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
My grizzle about Windows 11 is that one of my computers has a weird fault that experts seem unable to fix,
other than to charge a diagnostic fee to provide a report
that reads, “Unable to replicate problem”.
Friends advise me for free that “it seems like a hardware
problem” and then bombard me with suggestions, none of
which I understand, other than that my computer probably
uses special screws that discourage DIY repair.
The weird problem is that although my computer works
most of the time, if I’ve just done a lot of work since I last
opened an important file, my computer stops spontaneously, just before autosave tries to save what I’ve done.
The second part of my grizzle is that when my computer
is working, it seems impossible to persuade it to cease
pestering me about some cloud thingy. In desperation, I
bought a second computer, and it seems not to exhibit the
weird problem, confirming the “It seems like hardware”
diagnosis, but having two computers mostly just doubles
my “where are my files hiding now?” problems.
I’m experiencing a Catch-22 trying to get my files from
the broken computer to the unbroken computer. Yes, I know
Microsoft claims that their cloud thingy makes this easy.
I’ve read way more Windows Help files than my sanity can
bear, but they seem to be written in a modern version of
Klingon that Google is unable to translate, other than into
an older version of Klingon.
Maybe this is an opportunity for Silicon Chip. Magazines
dedicated to Windows want to tell me about advanced features and the latest technology that I just find mysterious.
Maybe Silicon Chip might be the right place to publish an
article explaining the basics of how to use a modern computer efficiently.
After all, when I buy a new car, I don’t expect some mysterious cloud thingy to transfer all the dents, scratches, rattles, squeaks, and clonks from my old car to my new one!
Keith Anderson, Kingston, Tas.
Comment: we aren’t aiming for “unkind remarks”, but
Microsoft’s push for Windows 10 users to upgrade to Windows 11 seems driven more by what benefits Microsoft
than by what benefits those users. Like you, we don’t find
OneDrive useful. Computers should do things in the way
the user wants, not tell the user how they should do things.
Have you tried FreeFileSync? We find it works really well
for keeping files synchronised between multiple computers via shared storage. And, importantly, it tells you what
it is going to do before it does it.
If your problematic computer has an Intel 13th or 14th
generation CPU (“Raptor Lake”), be aware that many of
those CPUs are defective. They might work fine at first but
can degrade, and start crashing frequently.
It’s also good practice to save your work regularly, just in
case. Get in the habit of pressing CTRL+S every few minutes!
Mains Timer from Circuit Notebook works well
Some time ago, I asked for details on a mains timer unit
I built that I had lost the details of. If it may help others,
I found that it was published as a Circuit Notebook entry
by David Eather in the October 2011 issue, titled “Mains
timer has no stand-by power” (siliconchip.au/Article/1187).
SC
James Newman, Mt Maunganui, New Zealand.
ourPCB
LOCAL SERVICE <at> OVERSEAS PRICES
AUSTRALIA
PCB Manufacturing
Full Turnkey Assembly
Wiring Harnesses
Solder Paste Stencils
small or large volume orders
premium-grade wiring
low cost PCB assembly
laser-cut and electropolished
Instant Online Buying of Prototype PCBs
www.ourpcb.com.au
8
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
0417 264 974
siliconchip.com.au
$
89 (Q170)
You’ll never need a
20mm Battery Again
The new
calipers are available with either IP-54
(dust and water resistant) or IP-67 (coolant proof) protection. The series is offered
in 150mm, 200mm and 300mm sizes. Each model recharges in under three
hours, so you will never look for a battery again!
129 (Q175)
FOR MORE
PRODUCTS VISIT
MACHINERYHOUSE.COM.AU/
SIC2511
SYDNEY
BRISBANE
MELBOURNE
(03) 9212 4422
(08) 9373 9999
(08) 9373 9969
1/2 Windsor Rd,
Northmead
625 Boundary Rd,
Coopers Plains
4 Abbotts Rd,
Dandenong
11 Valentine St,
Kewdale
Unit 11/20 Cheltenham Pde,
Woodville
(02) 9890 9111
(07) 3715 2200
PERTH
Specifications & prices are subject to change without notification.
ADELAIDE
10_SIC_271125
$
PRODUCT SHOWCASE
Electronex 2026 in Sydney: Rosehill Gardens Event Centre, 3rd & 4th June
Following the outstanding success
of last May’s Electronex Electronics
Design and Assembly Expo held in
Melbourne, Electronex 2026 Sydney
has generated a strong response, with
over 85% of exhibition space already
booked.
The 2026 Expo will take place at
Rosehill Gardens Event Centre, Sydney, on the 3rd and 4th of June 2026,
in conjunction with the annual Surface
Mount and Circuit Board Association
(SMCBA) conference.
The Melbourne show, staged alongside National Manufacturing Week
(NMW), attracted a record number
of engineers, managers and senior
decision-makers from across the manufacturing and electronics industries.
With 85 stands representing more than
100 companies, it was the largest Electronex held to date.
More than 250 exhibiting staff also
took part in valuable networking
opportunities, including the popular
Exhibitor Networking Function.
Visitor numbers were around 15%
higher than Electronex 2023 (the last
time it was held in Melbourne), and
exhibitors were delighted with the
quality of enquiries.
Face-to-face contact remains invaluable for discussing technical requirements and discovering new technologies in this vital high-tech manufacturing sector.
10
Silicon Chip
Electronex is now in its 14th year
and firmly established as Australia’s premier event for the electronics
industry.
Strong visitor engagement &
industry support
The Melbourne Expo drew around
2000 trade visitors from all Australian
states and New Zealand, reflecting the
show’s national reach. The concurrent Surface Mount and Circuit Board
conference featured a stellar lineup
of local and international speakers,
offering deep insights into current and
emerging technologies.
A post-show visitor survey reinforced the event’s value. 75% of
attendees were directly involved in
purchasing, specifying, or recommending products. 93% discovered
new companies, while 85% discovered new products or technologies.
97% said that a dedicated event such
as Electronex is beneficial to their
industry.
Notably, 56% were first-time visitors, and many long-term exhibitors
reported that it was one of the most
successful events they had attended.
Competitions and technical
highlights
The free on-floor seminars were also
well attended, giving exhibitors a platform to present the latest innovations
Australia's electronics magazine
Australasian Exhibitions
and Events Pty Ltd
Tel: (03) 9676 2133
mail: info<at>auexhibitions.com.au
Web: www.electronex.com.au
and solutions. The SMCBA, Australia’s association for electronics design
and assembly professionals, with support from IPC International, also conducted the Australian rounds of the
IPC Hand Soldering Competition and
the inaugural IPC/WHMA Wire Harness Competition.
In a closely contested HSC, Tony
Cimino from the Australian Centre
for Robotics took first place, ahead of
Rodney Tacey from Bluefish444. Tony
received a JBC B-Iron Soldering Station and an invitation to compete in
the World Finals in Munich, Germany.
The Wire Harness Competition winner was Sai Praneeth Jasti from Design
2000, with Tony Cimino taking runnerup honours.
Join us at Electronex 2026
With almost all the exhibition space
already sold, companies interested in
participating in Electronex 2026 Sydney who haven’t already booked are
encouraged to secure their stands as
soon as possible.
siliconchip.com.au
TECHY GIFTS WORTH
DROPPING HINTS ABOUT?
MARK YOUR CALENDAR:
Thurs 4th of Dec to Wed 24th of Dec, 2025
2" LCD
WHILE
STOCKS LAST
BUY 2 FOR
$
25
$
SAVE 15%
NOW ONLY
3495
.
Waterproof
Smart Fitness Band
Features step counter,
smartphone push notifications
and more.
QC3113 RRP $14.95EA
SAVE 30%
1080p
Dash Camera
120° wide-angle lens, motion
sensing and parking mode. QV3874
$
UP TO 500MM/S
PRINT SPEED
359
SAVE $40
SEE NEXT PAGE
FOR MORE
3D PRINTERS
UP TO 225 X 225 X
265MM BUILD VOLUME
NOW ONLY
2495
$
.
SAVE 25%
NOW ONLY
14
$
95
EA
.
SAVE 25%
5000mAh
Mini Power Banks
MB3860 - MB3863
Handheld Deep
Tissue Massage Gun
Features 6 speed settings
& 4 massage heads. GH1768
PRECISION
MEETS PERFORMANCE
Neptune 4 Filament 3D Printer
With auto bed levelling and 4.3" colour touchscreen. TL4970
SEE MORE R/C TOYS
IN-STORE OR ONLINE
$
ONLY
$
24 95
.
EA
AVAILABLE
IN BLUE OR GREY
ONLY
54
95
.
50M RANGE
26CM
LONG
SMOKE SPRAY
EFFECTS
$
ONLY
6995
.
SPEEDS
UP TO 18KM/H
Electric 2-in-1 Water
& Bubble Gatling Gun
Switch between soaking your friends with a powerful
stream of water or a flurry of bubbles. GT4356
1:18 Scale Off-Road
Thunderbolt R/C Car
Features 20+ RGB lighting effects
and dual smoke spray. Ages 8+. GT4329
JUST LIKE THE
REAL THING
42CM LONG
1:18 Scale Semi-Alloy
R/C Excavator
Enjoy authentic construction gameplay.
Integrated LED lights. Ages 8+. GT5001
Portable Fridge/Freezer
SALE
^Selected Models
THE
PERFECT GIFT, WRAPPED IN A CARD!
*Conditions apply - see website for full T&Cs
Prices shown in $AUD, and correct at time of publication but are subject to change. Jaycar reserves the right to change prices if and when required.
FOR CURIOUS AND
CREATIVE MINDS
BUILD VOLUME UP TO
420 X 420 X 480MM
$
T L4 824
UP TO 500MM/S
PRINT SPEED
TL6362
TL6366
WHILE STOCKS LAST!
NOW FROM
20 95
.
SAVE 15%
TL6256
BUILD VOLUME UP TO
153.36 X 77.76 X 175MM
TL6000
Selected
1kg Filaments
and Resins
PRINT SPEED
UP TO 70MM/H
TL6000 - TL6366
Limited stock. While stocks
last
PROTECT YOUR
FILAMENT
NOW FROM
$
USB, LAN &
WI-FI FILE TRANSFER
719
SAVE $80
NOW FROM
$
SAVE<at> 60
$
WHILE
STOCKS LAST
$
299
139
SAVE<at>$20
Neptune 4 Max
Filament 3D Printer
Huge build platform, quiet and fast
operation. 3.4" colour touchscreen.
TL4976
Selected Resin 3D Printers
Mars 4 9K
Mars 5 Ultra
TL4824 NOW ONLY $299 SAVE $50
TL4832 NOW ONLY $539 SAVE $60
TL5012
Filament Dryer Boxes
S2 TL5012 NOW $139 SAVE $10
S4 TL5010 NOW $279 SAVE $20
IMMERSIVE 360º VR KITS
2
INCLUDES VR GOGGLES
1
$
ONLY
5995
KJ9086
.
Cold Case
Murder Mystery
3
$
ONLY
5995 Learning Kits
EA
.
Includes 50 piece
evidence box. KJ9085
Dino-Dig
KJ9086
Solar System KJ9091
FROM ONLY
$
1495
KJ9082
KJ9079
MULTIPLE CIRCUITS TO BUILD
.
CRAFT FOR GLAM
$
1. Glitter Pen: Personalise 3 pens, available in 3 different
themes.
Ages 6+. KJ9401 ONLY $14.95
2. Soaps & Bath Bomb Kit: Create real soaps & scented
bath bombs.
Ages 8+. KJ9404 ONLY $24.95
3. Pen Creator Studio Kit: Create up to 10 personalised
pens.
Ages 6+. KJ9410 ONLY $59.95
.
$
2495 Christmas
Themed DIY Wooden Kits
.
5 models available. KJ9079 - KJ9095
$
GA0050
2
ONLY
14
95
.
Crystal Garden
Grow colourful
crystals. GA0075
$
FROM
1995
.
3995
FROM ONLY
EXPLORE GIFTS FROM OUR
$
ONLY
DIY Wooden Kits
17 models available.
GA0050 - GA0066
FROM $19.95 - $39.95
ONLY
29
95
.
Aquarium Lamp
GA0025
Limited stock.
While stocks last
Interaction Brain Box LED Experiments
Encourages STEM learning and critical thinking
in a fun, engaging way. GA0080
RANGE
$
ONLY
44 95
.
7 in 1
Gameboard Set
GA0049
Prices shown in $AUD, and correct at time of publication but are subject to change. Jaycar reserves the right to change prices if and when required.
$
FOR MAKERS WHO LOVE
THEIR WORKBENCH
NOW ONLY
29 95
TS1610
.
YH5416
SAVE $ 10
NOW FROM
$
NON-CONTACT AC
VOLTAGE TESTER
6995
YH5415
.
SAVE<at>$ 30
MEASURES AC & DC
VOLTAGE & CURRENT
Autoranging Multimeter
Cat III 600V, 10A, 2000 count, backlight, data
hold. QM1529
Ultrasonic Cleaners
Clean jewellery & other small parts.
450ML YH5415 NOW $69.95 SAVE $13
1.8L
YH5416 NOW $139
SAVE $30
TS1564
3X MAGNIFICATION
$
NOW ONLY
4995
.
NOW FROM
SAVE 10
$
$
NOW ONLY
LED Magnifying
Lamp with
Third Hand
$
109
SAVE $70
Multi-purpose tool for
detailed work. TH1989
.
Pro Piezo Gas
Soldering Iron Kit
Includes tips, hot air blower, deflector
and cleaning sponge/tray. TS1318
NOW ONLY
$
SAVE<at> 50
$
240V Soldering Stations
Adjustable temperature. Mains powered.
8W TS1610 NOW $39.95 SAVE $10
48W TS1564 NOW $99
SAVE $50
NOW ONLY
1995
$
.
34 95
.
SAVE 25%
SAVE 10%
NOW ONLY
$
127mm Precision Angled Side Cutter
Easily cut leads, ideal for fine PCB work.
Carbon steel. TH1897
24
SAVE 20%
Crimping Tool
for Non-Insulated Lugs
Includes built-in wire cutter. TH1834
210 PCS
$
3995
NOW ONLY
4995
MAGNETIC
STORAGE
FOR BITS
Screwdriver Set
Great tool to repair electronic
gadgets and devices. Made
from S2 steel. TD2134
NOW ONLY
$
HIGH
TEMPERATURE
RANGE UP TO
1300°C
48 PCS
139
SAVE $ 60
.
SAVE 10%
Gas Blow Torch
Adjustable flame. Piezo
ignition with safety lock. TS1660
Butane Gas NA1020 ONLY $5.95
$
NOW ONLY
59
95
.
SAVE $ 20
SEE IN HARD TO
REACH PLACES
Rotary Tool Kit
Engrave, drill, sand & polish. Ideal for
fine or intricate hobby work. Includes
flexible shaft. TD2459
Inspection Camera
Excellent for inspecting or locating
objects in tight spaces. 2.4" LCD.
QC8710
25% OFF SELECTED
QC9132
Selected Security
Cameras, CCTV Kits
& Accessories
Limited stock. While stocks last
QV9020
QV9228
QV9220
TERMS & CONDITIONS: Prices shown in $AUD, and valid from 4/12/25 to 24/12/25. Stock may be limited on sale items. No rain checks. Savings on Original RRP (ORRP). Prices are correct
at time of publication but are subject to change. Jaycar reserves the right to change prices if and when required. Page 1: MULTIBUYS: 2 x QC3113 for $25. Page 4: MULTIBUYS: 2 x YS5545
3
for $10. 2 x GT4106 for $30. 2 x GT4296 for $30. 2 x GT4083 for $40. SUPPLY CHAIN DISRUPTION: We apologise for factors out of our control which may result in some items not being
available on the advertised on-sale date of the catalogue. For full T&Cs see website.
BEST SELLERS,
NO GUESS WORK
STUFF THAT STOCKING
WITH 2 FOR DEALS
BUY 2 FOR
$
NOW ONLY
$
NOW ONLY
12 95
$
.
NOW ONLY
1995
$
.
SAVE 20%
FM transmitter. AR3140
SILVER OR
BLACK , 3 SIZES
NOW ONLY
$
SAVE $20
SAVE $30
EA
.
Safe for children 8+.
YS5545 RRP $7.95EA
1000 Lumen
Rechargeable LED Torch
ST3524
5995
$
Amazing Fly Gun
SAVE 30%
In-Car Handsfree Kit
NOW ONLY
SAVE 35%
.
SAVE 30%
AM/FM
Pocket Radio
AR1458
34 95
BUY 2 FOR
6995
$
.
QC3150
30
SAVE 35%
Mini Boomerang Spinner Drone
Smart Rings
with Charging Case
QC3162
Monitor your sleep, daily
activity, heart rate & more.
QC3150 - QC3162
Boomerang, frisbee and spinner in one! Ages 14+.
GT4106 RRP $23.50EA
Compact Wireless
Weather Station
Displays time, calendar, weather,
moon phase and more. XC0366
BUY 2 FOR
10W WIRELESS QI CHARGER
NOW FROM
$
10
12,000MAH
POWER BANK
NOW ONLY
139
$
HALF
PRICE
$
199
SAVE 35%
TORCH &
SOS BEACON
SAVE $50
30
R/C Car in a Can
12 colours available.
75mm long. Ages 6+.
GT4296 RRP $24.95EA
QC8051
2 X USB PORTS
WILL START ALMOST
ANYTHING
MONITOR LOCAL WILDLIFE OR USE AS
AN OUTDOOR SECURITY CAMERA
850A 12V Compact Jump Starter,
Power Bank & Wireless Qi Charger
Outdoor Trail Cameras
4K
QC8051 NOW $139 SAVE $140
4K w/Solar QC8065 NOW $149 SAVE $150
BUY 2 FOR
$
MB3764
PAIR UP. PLAY ON.
2 PK
40
SAVE 15%
R/C Boat in a Can
FROM ONLY
$
5995
GT4316
$
.
Multiple colours available. 108mm long.
Ages 6+. GT4083 RRP $24.95EA
ONLY
5995
.
R/C Racing Car & Track Sets
Features 2 cars, 2 lanes and 1 track for
endless fun. Ages 6+. GT4314 - GT4318
Laser Tag Battle Guns
3 SETS TO
CHOOSE FROM
HANDHELD
ACTION!
Transform your backyard into an epic battleground.
Full colour lighting, sound effects & vibrations.
Ages 8+. GT4085
THE PERFECT GIFT,
WRAPPED IN A CARD!
Grab a gift card between $20 to $500*
because perfect gifts come in all sizes!
*Conditions apply - see website for full T&Cs.
Prices shown in $AUD, and correct at time of publication but are subject to change. Jaycar reserves the right to change prices if and when required.
ON SALE Thursday 4th of Dec to Wednesday 24th of Dec, 2025
NEED IT NOW?
1 HOUR CLICK & COLLECT
Shop online & collect in-store
*Conditions apply - see website for full details
3HR EXPRESS DELIVERY
FROM OUR SHELVES TO YOUR HOME FAST!
Simply order before 2PM
*Conditions apply - see website for full details
SCORE FREE
DELIVERY ON US
With online orders over $99
*Conditions apply - see website for full details
ONLINESHOP
SILICON
CHIP
.com.au/shop
PCBs, CASE PIECES AND PANELS
WAVEFORM GENERATOR
PICO 2 AUDIO ANALYSER (BLACK)
PICO/2/COMPUTER
↳ FRONT & REAR PANELS (BLACK)
ROTATING LIGHT (BLACK)
433MHZ TRANSMITTER
VERSATILE BATTERY CHECKER
↳ FRONT PANEL (BLACK, 0.8mm)
TOOL SAFETY TIMER
RGB LED ANALOG CLOCK (BLACK)
USB POWER ADAPTOR (BLACK, 1mm)
HWS SOLAR DIVERTER PCB & INSULATING PANELS
SSB SHORTWAVE RECEIVER PCB SET
↳ FRONT PANEL (BLACK)
433MHz RECEIVER
SMARTPROBE
↳ SWD PROGRAMMING ADAPTOR
MAR25
MAR25
APR25
APR25
APR25
APR25
MAY25
MAY25
MAY25
MAY25
MAY25
JUN25
JUN25
JUN25
JUN25
JUL25
JUL25
Subscribers get a 10% discount on all orders for parts
04104251
$5.00
04107231
$5.00
07104251
$5.00
07104252/3 $10.00
09101251
$2.50
15103251
$2.50
11104251
$5.00
11104252
$7.50
10104251
$5.00
19101251
$15.00
18101251
$2.50
18110241
$20.00
CSE250202-3 $15.00
CSE250204 $7.50
15103252
$2.50
P9054-04
$5.00
P9045-A
$2.50
DUCTED HEAT TRANSFER CONTROLLER
↳ TEMPERATURE SENSOR ADAPTOR
↳ CONTROL PANEL
MIC THE MOUSE (PCB SET, WHITE)
USB-C POWER MONITOR (PCB SET, INCLUDES FFC)
HOME AUTOMATION SATELLITE
PICKIT BASIC POWER BREAKOUT
DUAL TRAIN CONTROLLER TRANSMITTER
DIGITAL PREAMPLIFIER MAIN PCB (4 LAYERS)
↳ FRONT PANEL CONTROL
↳ POWER SUPPLY
VACUUM CONTROLLER MAIN PCB
↳ BLAST GATE ADAPTOR
POWER RAIL PROBE
RGB LED STAR
EARTH RADIO
DCC DECODER
AUG25
AUG25
AUG25
AUG25
AUG25
SEP25
SEP25
OCT25
OCT25
OCT25
OCT25
OCT25
OCT25
NOV25
DEC25
DEC25
DEC25
17101251
17101252
17101253
SC7528
SC7527
15104251
18106251
09110245
01107251
01107252
01107253
10109251
10109252
P9058-1-C
16112251
06110251
09111241
$10.00
$2.50
$2.50
$7.50
$7.50
$3.50
$2.00
$3.00
$30.00
$2.50
$7.50
$10.00
$2.50
$5.00
$12.50
$5.00
$2.50
PRE-PROGRAMMED MICROS
As a service to readers, Silicon Chip Online Shop stocks microcontrollers and microprocessors used in new projects (from 2012 on) and some selected
older projects – pre-programmed and ready to fly!
Some micros from copyrighted and/or contributed projects may not be available.
$10 MICROS
$15 MICROS
PIC12F617-I/P
PIC16F1455-I/P
Battery-Powered Model Railway Transmitter (Jan25)
Battery-Powered Model Railway TH Receiver (Jan25)
Dual Train Controller (Transmitter / TH Receiver, Oct25)
PIC16F1455-I/SL Battery-Powered Model Railway SMD Receiver (Jan25)
USB Programmable Frequency Divider (Feb25)
Dual Train Controller (SMD Receiver, Oct25)
PIC16LF1455-I/P New GPS-Synchronised Analog Clock (Sep22)
PIC16F1459-I/P
8CH Learning IR Remote (Oct24), Heat Transfer Controller (Aug25)
Vacuum Controller (Oct25)
PIC16F15214-I/SN Silicon Chirp Cricket (Apr23), Mic The Mouse (Aug25)
PIC16F15214-I/P Filament Dryer (Oct24), Tool Safety Timer (May25)
PIC16F15224-I/SL NFC IR Keyfob Transmitter (Feb25), Rotating Light (Apr25)
PIC16F18126-I/SL DCC Decoder (Dec25), RGB LED Star (Dec25)
PIC16F18146-I/SO Versatile Battery Checker (May25), RGB LED ‘Analog’ Clock (May25)
USB-C Power Monitor (Aug25)
PIC16LF15323-I/SL Remote Mains Switch (TX, Jul22), Secure Remote Switch (TX, Dec23)
STM32G030K6T6 Variable Speed Drive Mk2 (Nov24)
PIC16F1847-I/P
PIC16F88-I/P
PIC24FJ256GA702-I/SS
PIC32MX170F256B-50I/SP
STM32L031F6P6
Digital Capacitance Meter (Jan25)
Battery Charge Controller (Jun22), Railway Semaphore (Apr22)
ESR Test Tweezers (Jun24)
Micromite LCD BackPack V1-V3 (Feb16 / May17 / Aug19)
SmartProbe (Jul25)
$20 MICROS
PIC32MK0128MCA048
Power LCR Meter (Mar25)
PIC32MX270F256D-50I/PT Digital Preamplifier (Oct25)
$25 MICROS
PIC32MX170F256B-50I/SO + PIC16F1455-I/SL
Micromite Explore-40 (SC5157, Oct24)
PIC32MX470F512H-120/PT Micromite Explore 64 (Aug 16), Micromite Plus (Nov16)
PIC32MX470F512L-120/PT Micromite Explore 100 (Sep16)
$30 MICROS
PIC32MZ2048EFH064-I/PT DSP Crossover/Equaliser (May19), Low-Distortion DDS (Feb20)
DIY Reflow Oven Controller (Apr20), Dual Hybrid Supply (Feb22)
KITS & SPECIALISED COMPONENTS
RGB LED STAR KIT (SC7535)
Includes the mostly-assembled board and all non-optional components
except the power supply (see p43, Dec25)
EARTH RADIO KIT (SC7582)
Includes everything to build the radio itself except the case and battery,
plus the plug for the antenna (see p65, Dec25)
RP2350B COMPUTER
(NOV 25)
Assembled Board: a fully-assembled PCB with all non-optional components,
front and rear panels are sold separately below (SC7531; see p28, Nov25)
- front & rear panels (SC7532)
(OCT 25)
- PIC16F1455-I/P programmed with 0911024D.HEX (Transmitter)
- PIC16F1455-I/P programmed with 0911024S(or T).HEX (Receiver, TH)
- PIC16F1455-I/SL programmed with 0911024S(or T).HEX (Receiver, SMD)
firmware ending with “S.HEX” is for train 1, while “T.HEX” is for train 2
PICKIT BASIC POWER BREAKOUT KIT (SC7512)
Includes all parts except the jumper wire and glue (see p39, Sep25)
USB-C POWER MONITOR KIT (SC7489)
(AUG 25)
$55.00
433MHz RECEIVER KIT (SC7447)
(JUN 25)
$25.00
VERSATILE BATTERY CHECKER KIT (SC7465)
(MAY 25)
RGB LED ‘ANALOG’ CLOCK KIT (SC7416)
(MAY 25)
USB POWER ADAPTOR COMPLETE KIT (SC7433)
(MAY 25)
(SEP 25)
433MHz TRANSMITTER KIT (SC7430)
(APR 25)
Includes all parts except a CR2032 cell (see p64, Aug25)
Includes all non-optional parts except the case, cell & glue (see p39, Aug25)
(DEC 25)
(DEC 25)
DUAL TRAIN CONTROLLER MICROCONTROLLERS
(AUG 25)
$80.00
DCC DECODER KIT (SC7524)
Includes everything in the parts list (see p73, Dec25)
MIC THE MOUSE KIT (SC7508)
(DEC 25)
$90.00
$7.50
$10.00
$10.00
$10.00
Includes the PCB and all onboard parts (see p66, Jun25)
Includes everything in the parts list (including the case), except the optional
components, batteries and glue (see p30, May25)
$37.50
$60.00
$20.00
$65.00
Includes all the parts except the power supply. When buying the kit select either a BZ-121
GPS module or Pico W (unprogrammed) for the time source (see p66, May25)
$65.00
Includes everything in the parts list and a choice of one USB socket: USB-C power only;
USB-C power+data; Type-B mini; or Type-B micro (see p80, May25)
$10.00
Includes the PCB and all onboard parts (see p75, Apr25)
$20.00
$20.00
$12 flat rate for postage within Australia. Overseas? Place an order via our website for a quote.
All items subect to availability. Prices valid for month of magazine issue only. All prices in Australian dollars & include GST where applicable.
HOW TO ORDER
INTERNET (24/7)
PAYPAL (24/7)
eMAIL (24/7)
MAIL (24/7)
PHONE – (9-5:00 AET, Mon-Fri)
siliconchip.com.au/Shop
silicon<at>siliconchip.com.au
silicon<at>siliconchip.com.au
PO Box 194, MATRAVILLE, NSW 2036
(02) 9939 3295, +612 for international
You can also pay by cheque/money order (Orders by mail only) or bank transfer. Make cheques payable to Silicon Chip.
12/25
HUMANOID & AN
Agility Digit
www.agilityrobotics.com
Boston Dynamics Atlas
https://bostondynamics.com/atlas
Unitree H1
www.unitree.com/h1
Tesla Optimus
www.tesla.com/en_eu/AI
Like many ideas that started as science fiction, humanoid and android robots are
now a reality. They have not yet been perfected – but they are here. Last month
we covered the tech; and now we showcase some of the most interesting robots.
W
e will now look at some historical
humanoid robots, followed by
those that are under active development or are available commercially.
Leonardo da Vinci’s
mechanical knight
Around 1495, Leonardo conceived
a “mechanical knight” that could perform actions such as moving its arms,
neck & jaw, raising its visor, sitting and
standing (Fig.18). It was operated with
gears and pulleys but obviously had
no electronic intelligence.
The significance of this robot is that
it is thought to be the first demonstration of the ability to mimic human-like
actions by mechanical means. Leonardo’s sketches for this machine were
rediscovered in the 1950s by Carlo
16
Silicon Chip
Pedretti and, in 1993, Mark Rosheim
collaborated with him to reconstruct
the robot.
As designed by Leonardo, it has
three degrees of freedom in its legs
and four in its arms. Pedretti described
it as “the first articulated humanoid
robot in the history of Western Civilisation”. There is a BBC audio presentation about the robot at www.bbc.
co.uk/sounds/play/m0004mf2
Elecktro
Elektro was an early humanoid robot
built by Westinghouse in 1937 for the
1939/1940 World’s Fair in New York.
It was extremely impressive and popular at the time, and it was featured in
daily shows at the fair – see Fig.19.
It was 2.1m tall, weighed 120kg,
Australia's electronics magazine
could perform 26 actions and had 700
words stored on eight 78 RPM records
in its chest cavity. The 26 actions were
hard-wired in a fixed sequence so that
in a show, the same script from the
handler resulting in the same sequence
of actions every time.
The robot gave the illusion of being
voice-controlled, but electronics of
the era were not advanced enough to
perform voice recognition. The robot
responded to the controller’s voice,
but only to the rhythm. For example, speaking one word might correspond to one impulse to close a
relay. Two words would correspond
to two impulses which might perform
another electro-mechanical action.
It could also recognise red or green
colours with a photocell, and state
siliconchip.com.au
NDROID ROBOTS
Part 2: by Dr David Maddison, VK3DSM
Figure 02
www.figure.ai
1X NEO Gamma
www.1x.tech/neo
Apptronik Apollo
https://apptronik.com/apollo
Fig.18: a
reconstruction
of Leonardo’s
“mechanical
knight” robot.
Source: https://w.
wiki/EotZ
Fig.19: the Elektro
robot. Source:
www.computertimeline.
com/timeline/
the-robots-ofwestinghouse
the colour. See the video titled “Elektro the Smoking Robot (Odd History)”
at https://youtu.be/sxGDdwbcfJg and
“The World’s First Celebrity Robot” at
https://youtu.be/dwBLOluOiUY
The system of voice control had
its origins in Westinghouse engineer
Roy James Wensley, who was issued a
patent in 1929 for a “supervisory control system” that enabled the control
siliconchip.com.au
of machinery over telephone or radio
connection by “voice”.
It wasn’t truly voice recognition,
but a series of tones generated with
pitch pipes or tuning forks at 600,
900 and 1400Hz. These activated
relays via tuned circuits, enabling
equipment such as at a power plant
or telephone exchange to be remotely
controlled.
Australia's electronics magazine
Booster Robotics T1
www.boosterobotics.com/robots/
The system was demonstrated with
a robot prior to Elektro called Herbert
Televox. Presumably, this system was
modified for Elektro to use impulses
instead of tones.
This system of tone control became
the basis of the DTMF (dual-tone
multi-frequency) signalling used in
traditional telephone exchanges.
Current humanoid and
android robots
We do not have space to include a
description of every available humanoid robot, so have selected the most
interesting ones.
1X Technologies
www.1x.tech
The Neo Gamma is a humanoid
robot under development by a Norwegian AI and robotics company,
intended for domestic service (Fig.20).
Neo Gamma uses artificial intelligence
and is trained on household tasks
using human motion-capture data. It
December 2025 17
Fig.20: the Neo Gamma
from 1X Technologies
performs domestic
duties. Source: www.
therobotreport.com/1xbuilt-humanoid-neogamma-better-fit-home
Fig.21: Australian Abi
companion robots.
Source: www.dromeda.
com.au/product
is covered in a knitted fabric to give it
a friendly appearance. EVE is another
humanoid robot from 1X.
Abi
www.dromeda.com.au
Abi is an Australian humanoid
robot, made in Melbourne – see Fig.21.
It is intended as a companion robot
with “playful features and infinite
empathy”, for use in nursing homes
and similar care facilities.
It uses advanced AI and machine
learning to recognise faces, understand
and express emotions and remember
conversations from days or months
ago.
It interacts with each resident
based on their personal cues, including speaking their preferred language.
Abi is fluent in 90 languages and can
participate in small group activities
such as singing, dancing, games and
conversation.
Actroids
www.kokoro-dreams.co.jp
The Actroid-DER series of android
robots is designed with strong human
likeness by Osaka University and manufactured by the Kokoro Company Ltd.
Actroids were first displayed in 2003,
so they are relatively old, and various
models are available to rent.
A model from the
Actroid-DER series
is shown here. It
performs simple functions
like blinking and
speaking using
AI. Later models
have 47 actuators,
which are pneumatically driven.
For more information, see the video at
https://youtu.be/l8qHXdKF300
AgiBot
www.agibot.com
This Chinese company has developed the AI-powered Genie Operator-1
(GO-1) model for quickly training
humanoid robots in a variety of tasks
– see Fig.23. According to Agibot, the
model enables robots to “understand
instructions in natural language and
perform reasoning, rather than being
limited to preprogrammed routines”.
AgiBot also produces a variety of
robots, such as the AgiBot A2 interactive service robot. The open-source
AgiBot X1 robot is documented at
www.agibot.com/DOCS/OS
Apollo A1
https://apptronik.com
Apptronik from Austin, Texas, has
developed the Apollo A1 general-
purpose humanoid robot, intended
for jobs in warehouses, manufacturing
plants and so on – see Fig.24.
As the robot is further developed, its
use will be extended to areas like construction, oil and gas extraction, electronics production, retail, home delivery, aged care and others. Apptronik
has origins in the development of
robots for NASA, such as Valkyrie
(described below).
Apollo is 172cm tall, has a run time
of four hours with a swappable battery
pack, weighs 72kg, can carry 25kg, is
modular and the torso can even be
mounted on a wheeled or stationary
platform. It has a chest-mounted display that shows its status.
Apollo can be tethered to a power
supply to allow continuous operation.
It has ‘force control’ systems to limit
the amount of mechanical force it
can impose to enhance safety around
humans. It walks within a defined
perimeter, so it does not get too close
to people or objects. It immediately
pauses when moving objects are
detected in its vicinity.
Mercedes Benz has an agreement to
test Apollo in its manufacturing operations. See the video at https://youtu.
be/TfUOg38iXxo
ASIMO https://global.honda/en/robotics/
Apart from cars, Honda is famous for
one of the earliest humanoid robots,
ASIMO (Advanced Step in Innovative
Mobility) – see Fig.25. It was retired
in 2018. Honda researchers researched
the following things with ASIMO:
O Moving around while sharing the
same space with people.
O Performing tasks using its hands.
O Interacting with people, including
Fig.22: an Actroid-DER series android.
Source: www.kokoro-dreams.co.jp/
english/rt_tokutyu/actroid/
Fig.23: AgiBot robots running GO-1
perform some kitchen tasks. Source:
https://youtu.be/9dvygD4G93c
18
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
understanding spoken words and controlling movement/behaviour by estimating the intention of nearby people.
Over its 20 years of demonstrations,
it walked a total of 7907km.
Honda continues to develop robotics, but with a focus on developing a
variety of robots with specific functions rather than just one general-
purpose humanoid robot.
Fig.24: the Apptronik A1 generalpurpose robot. Source: https://
apptronik.com
Digit
www.agilityrobotics.com
Agility Robotics from Albany, Oregon, USA has its origins in Oregon
State University. In 2023, they released
the current version of their bipedal
robot, digit – see Fig.26.
Digit is said to be the world’s first
commercially deployed humanoid
robot. They are currently in operation at Amazon and GXO Logistics.
Amazon has also stated they intend
to replace their entire human workforce by 2030. The robots cost around
US$250,000 ($380,000) each. See
https://youtu.be/NvYsGcQvMw8 and
https://youtu.be/MYzRPJ7TaLc
AheadForm
www.aheadform.com
Heads capable of expression are
among the most complicated things to
build for such robots, apart from the
software. Just as motor vehicle manufacturers might contract out specialists
to make certain components, the same
concept can apply to robots.
AheadForm specialises in making
robot heads capable of a wide variety of human-like facial expressions,
including subtle but important ones
such as smirks – see Fig.27. These
highly realistic heads are said to avoid
the “uncanny valley” in which humanlike heads are seen as not quite realistic enough, and thus disturbing to
the viewer.
AiMOGA Robot
Artificial Intelligence with
Multi-Objective Genetic Algorithm
was the robot’s original name, but it
is now called Mornine. Its job is as an
intelligent sales consultant for some
Chery car dealerships, with about 220
to be delivered – see Fig.28.
The robot is manufactured by Chery.
It uses a ‘multimodal sensory model’
to perceive a customer’s gestures and
questions by combining sensory data
from speech, visual and other data. It
then uses an “advanced emotion and
personality engine” for personalised
interactions.
siliconchip.com.au
Fig.25: Honda’s ASIMO (Advanced Step in Innovative Mobility)
showcased at the Tokyo Motor Show in 2011. Source: https://w.wiki/EpwP
Fig.26: a demonstration of
Digit robots from Agility
Robotics at work in a
warehouse.
Fig.27: the AheadForm
robot head (left) and
its creator (right).
Source: https://youtu.
be/gnyFtUU-TJ8
Fig.28: a Mornine robot
at a Chery dealership.
Source: https://
motorillustrated.com/
chery-debuts-humanoidrobot-mornine-to-dealerstheir-future-salesreps/153657/
Australia's electronics magazine
December 2025 19
It takes advantage of DeepSeek’s AI
and CheryGPT’s large language models
to understand natural language, give
appropriate responses and chat in any
of ten languages.
The robot can be used for other purposes apart from car sales, such as a
bookshop assistant, other sales roles,
companionship, shopping guide or
caregiver. The robot is 166cm tall and
weighs 55kg. Chery intends to launch
the robot commercially in 2027. One
estimate is that the robots will cost
around $89,000 each.
Fig.29: Alter3 after being instructed to
“take a selfie”. Source: https://arxiv.
org/pdf/2312.06571
Fig.30: the Ameca robot. Source:
https://engineeredarts.com/gallery/
Fig.31: the Berkeley Humanoid Lite.
Fig.32: the Booster T1
robot. Source: www.
boosterobotics.com/
robots
20
Alter3 https://tnoinkwms.github.io/ALTER-LLM
Alter3 is an experimental humanoid
robot from the University of Tokyo that
uses the GPT-4 large language model to
interpret instructions, then produces
separate code to generate the required
motions – see Fig.29.
There is a video showing the implementation of this code at https://youtu.
be/l4d6N_Rf8mk
Ameca
https://engineeredarts.com
A humanoid robot by UK company
Engineered Arts (Fig.30), Ameca is
designed for interaction with humans;
its legs are still under development.
Despite that, Ameca has advanced
facial expression capabilities,
extremely advanced emotional intelligence and conversational capabilities in multiple languages. It runs an
in-house-developed operating framework called Tritium; for its language
model, it uses OpenAI’s GPT 4.0 or can
be controlled by teleoperation.
It can watch, listen, learn, track
faces in real time, analyse the emotional state of someone speaking to it
and respond appropriately. Ameca is
available for purchase or rental. See
https://youtu.be/b9xFM61KKyc
Fig.33: the latest version of Boston
Dynamics’ Atlas robot. Source:
https://bostondynamics.com/atlas/
Berkeley Humanoid Lite
Berkeley Humanoid Lite (https://
lite.berkeley-humanoid.org) is an
open-source, customisable 3D-printed
humanoid robot – see Fig.31. It is 88cm
tall and weighs 16kg. Its developers
state that it can be made for around
US$5000 ($7650) with readily available components.
It can perform several useful tasks,
including manipulating a Rubik’s
Cube, and it can also be teleoperated.
To make it, you need a 3D printer that
can produce parts within a 20 × 20 ×
20cm workspace. For more details, see
https://youtu.be/dIdJGkMDFl4
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
Fig.34: Atlas picks and places parts
in an experimental situation. Source:
https://bostondynamics.com/video/
pick-carry-place-repeat
Fig.35: the torso of the Clone android
showing anatomical similarity to
a human. Source: https://x.com/
clonerobotics
Fig.36: the Pudu D9 robot. Source:
www.pudurobotics.com/en/products/
d9
Booster T1
www.boosterobotics.com
Booster Robotics is a Chinese company that has developed a humanoid
robot platform intended for developers to write their own software for –
see Fig.32. There is an online manual describing the robot with details
for developers at siliconchip.au/link/
ac7h
picking and placing a part is shown
in Fig.34.
D9
www.pudurobotics.com
Pudu Robotics is developing the
general-purpose D9 robot – see Fig.36
and the video at https://youtu.be/
gd5DdfJX_RM
Boston Dynamics Atlas
Boston Dynamics (website: https://
bostondynamics.com) is a subsidiary of Hyundai. It was one of the first
companies with a functional humanoid robot called Atlas, and there are
many impressive videos of its products on YouTube.
The latest version of Atlas is shown
in Fig.33. Unlike previous versions,
which were hydraulically actuated,
this one is fully electric. That makes
it quieter, less complicated, more compact, with more natural movements
and some say less intimidating.
Computationally, Atlas uses NVIDIA’s Isaac GR00T framework and the
NVIDIA Jetson Thor computing platform, which is specifically designed
for humanoid robots.
It uses the Blackwell GPU architecture with 2560 CUDA cores, 96 tensor
cores and Arm Neoverse V3AE CPUs
with 14 cores and 128GB of LPDDR5X
memory, giving up to 2070 FP4 teraflops of AI computing power (FP4 is
floating point 4-bit operations).
Hyundai are testing Boston Dynamics Atlas robots for building electric
cars in their Georgia, US manufacturing facilities and plan to roll them
out globally. A demonstration of Atlas
Clone
https://clonerobotics.com
Polish company Clone Robotics
developed Clone, which they describe
as an android. Clone adopts a different
approach from other humanoid robots.
It seeks to emulate the actual structure
of the human body, with anatomically
accurate bones, joints, muscles and a
nervous system – see Fig.35.
It is hydraulically actuated with
a 500W pump. It has an unusually
large 200 degrees of freedom, 206
bones, 1000 artificial muscle materials (known as myofibres) and 200 sensors. Myofibres are composed of mesh
tubes that contain balloons of hydraulic fluid. These are inflated or deflated
by hydraulic pressure. The aforementioned pump acts as the ‘heart’ of the
system.
The idea is based on the McKibben artificial muscle concept first
invented in the 1950s. For cooling, it
even ‘sweats’ fluid, just like a human.
In essence, Clone seeks to mimic the
human body.
Clone runs on an NVIDIA Jetson
Thor inference GPU in the skull running Cybernet, Clone’s visuomotor
foundation model. See Clone Robotics’s YouTube channel (www.youtube.
com/<at>CloneRobotics).
siliconchip.com.au
Certis
www.certisgroup.com
Certis is a Singapore company that
is using an Agibot humanoid robot
to study potential applications for
humanoid robots in security and integrated facilities management.
Australia's electronics magazine
EveR-4 android
The EveR-4 is
an android that
was developed at
the Korea Institute of Industrial
Technology and
was exhibited at
RoboWorld 2011
in Seoul.
It is one of a series of four such
androids. It can exhibit a wide range of
facial expressions and has over thirty
motors actuating its face.
The EverR-4 has been investigated
for use in jobs such as a medical receptionist, where the robot was positively
received by patients. See the videos at https://youtu.be/OvsZqPcnNIE
and https://youtu.be/b2GtBAPG1ho
(EveR-4 as a receptionist).
FALCON
FALCON is an experimental robot
control framework from Carnegie
Mellon University, designed to train
humanoid robots for a complex tasks
called “force-adaptive loco-manipulation”. This is walking or standing
and using their arms at the same time,
while applying strong, precise force.
Examples include pushing a wheelbarrow, opening a door or engaging in
a tug -of-war with another robot. Two
AI agents are used to accomplish such
tasks; one for the legs and the other
December 2025 21
for the arms – they communicate with
each other. The systems is tested on
humanoid platforms from Unitree and
Booster Robotics. See https://youtu.be/
OfsvJ5-Fyzg
Figure AI
www.figure.ai
An American robotics company, its
investors include OpenAI, NVIDIA
and Jeff Bezos.
It is aiming to build robots that learn
and reason like humans. Their most
advanced robot is Figure 02 (shown
in Fig.37), which runs the Helix generalist vision language action (VLA)
model.
The aim of Figure AI is to enable
robots to work in an unstructured
home environment with thousands
of objects it has never encountered
before, and to reason how to deal with
them without prior programming or
demonstrations.
Helix can also run on two robots
simultaneously, enabling them to
cooperatively solve problems and
share learning. This is shown by putting groceries away in the video at
https://youtu.be/Z3yQHYNXPws
Figure 02 with Helix is also
intended for industrial use, where it
will be introduced first, before being
brought to the domestic market. An
industrial environment is much more
structured than a home environment,
and should be easier to operate in.
According to Figure AI: VLM
(vision language model) backbones
are general, but not fast, while
robot visuomotor policies are fast
but not general. Helix resolves
this trade-off through two
complementary systems,
trained end-to-end to communicate:
O System 2 (S2) is an
onboard internet-pretrained
VLM operating at 7-9Hz for
scene understanding and
language comprehension,
enabling broad generalisation across objects and
contexts.
O System 1 (S1) is a fast
reactive visuomotor policy that
translates the latent semantic representations produced
by S2 into precise continuous
robot actions at 200Hz.
Fig.37: Figure AI’s Figure 02
robot uses a VLA model for
control. Source: www.figure.ai
22
Silicon Chip
This decoupled architecture allows
each system to operate at its optimal
timescale. S2 can “think slow” about
high-level goals, while S1 can “think
fast” to execute and adjust actions in
real-time. For example, during collaborative behaviour, S1 quickly adapts
to the changing motions of a partner
robot while maintaining S2’s semantic objectives.
Gary
www.hospital-robots.com
Gary is a wheeled hospital robot
from Israeli company Unlimited
Robotics – see Fig.40. It can perform
tasks such as providing bedside assistance to staff, medication reminders,
provide companionship to patients,
deliver supplies, sanitise, clean, automate mundane tasks etc.
It runs on an Intel Core i7 processor
with 512GB of memory and has a Google tensor processing unit (TPU) for its
AI for neural network machine learning. For software, it uses the Linux
operating system with the in-house
developed Ra-Ya platform, which is
designed to make it easier for inexperienced robot programmers to build
applications if they are familiar with
Python or JavaScript.
Geminoid HI-6
In 2006, Professor Hiroshi Ishiguro
of the Intelligent Robotics Laboratory
Fig.38 (below): the HUBO2
robot. Source: www.rainbowrobotics.com/en_hubo2
at The University of Osaka made an
android replica of himself, the Geminoid HI-1. It has now upgraded to the
Geminoid HI-6 – see Fig.42.
It is an upper body only and is teleoperated. It is pneumatically operated
with 16 actuators and has 16 degrees
of freedom.
The purpose of the android is to
explore questions of “what exactly
human presence is, whether human
presence can be transmitted to remote
locations, and whether androids can
surpass humans through experimentation”.
GR-1 & GR-2
www.fftai.com
Fourier is a Chinese company
that has developed the GR-1 and
GR-2 humanoid robots. The GR-2 is
a general purpose robot with sensors in its dextrous hands to make
them touch-sensitive. It can be programmed with frameworks like ROS
and NVIDIA Isaac Lab. See the video
at https://youtu.be/N7qYcOuR7P8
HMND 01
https://thehumanoid.ai
Humanoid has developed the
HMND 01 robot, which they describe
as a “labour automation unit” (see
Fig.39). It is 175cm tall, weighs 70kg,
has 41 degrees of freedom, a payload
capacity of 15kg, a runtime of four
hours and walking speed of 5.4km/h.
Uses for the robot include goods
handling, such as in warehouses,
picking and packing for e-commerce warehouses and parts handling in manufacturing operations.
HRP-5P
An experimental
humanoid robot developed in Japan in 2018
by the National Institute
of Advanced Industrial
Science and Technology, it was demonstrated
installing wall plasterboard sheeting similar
to Gyprock. See https://
youtu.be/fMwiZXxo9Qg
HUBO www.rainbow-robotics.com
Rainbow Robotics is a
Korean company that offers
the HUBO2, shown in Fig.38,
Fig.39: the HMND 01
robot. Source: TechNode –
siliconchip.au/link/ac7p
siliconchip.com.au
which they claim is the world’s first
humanoid robot to be commercialised.
The first HUBO was released in 2004,
with the HUBO2 going on sale in 2010.
It has made commercial appearances,
such as at the 2012 Philadelphia Phillies baseball game.
iCub
https://icub.iit.it
iCub is an open-source research and
recreational robot designed by a consortium of European universities for
research into human cognition and
artificial intelligence – see Fig.41. It
is 104cm tall and weighs 22kg.
It has been demonstrated with capabilities such as crawling, solving 3D
mazes, performing archery, producing
facial expressions, exercising force
control, grasping small objects, and
performing collision avoidance. It is
said to use a neuromorphic processor.
Fig.40: Gary, the hospital robot, enters
a room. Source: www.hospital-robots.
com/about
Fig.41: iCub at the Center for Robotics
and Intelligent Systems (CRIS).
Source: https://w.wiki/Eotd
Iggy Rob
www.igus.com
A partially humanoid robot; instead
of having legs, it has a wheeled base
(see Fig.43). Its suggested applications
include performing wait staff duties,
such as delivering food and drinks to
restaurant customers, parts delivery on
factory floors, and for education and
research into robotics. It costs about
US$54,500 ($83,500), is 1.7m tall and
can carry 100kg.
InMoov
https://inmoov.fr
The InMoov humanoid robot project is for hobbyists and universities,
with a whole community of developers, including in Australia and New
Zealand – see Fig.44. It is open source
and can be 3D printed on any standard
printer with a 12 × 12 × 12cm area.
It utilises two Arduino Mega or
Arduino Uno microcontroller boards,
two Nervo Board shields and 28 servo
motors. It has two cameras for object
and face tracking, speakers for speech,
one Kinect sensor (discontinued) or
OAK-D-Lite-FF for 3D depth and gesture recognition, and a PIR sensor for
presence detection. All of its fingers
are motorised.
Iron
Iron from car manufacturer Xpeng
(siliconchip.au/link/ac7i) uses their
proprietary 40-core Turing AI chip
with 3000 TOPS (trillions of operations per second) of processing power
and their Tianji AIOS AI operating system, which is also used in their cars.
It features 60 joints, 200 degrees
siliconchip.com.au
Fig.42: Professor Hiroshi Ishiguro with the android robot replica he made of
himself, Geminoid HI-6. Which one is which? Source: https://drive.google.com/
drive/folders/1RN710FOs7r9KJ2TmXkh-W_0cqcHUtlNj
Fig.43: the Iggy Rob robot. Source:
www.igus.com/automation/news/
humanoid-robot
Australia's electronics magazine
Fig.44: the torso of InMoov. Its lower
legs have not yet been developed.
Source: https://inmoov.fr/gallery-v2/
December 2025 23
Figs.45, 46 & 47: the Kuavo 4.0 robot (source: www.lejurobot.com/en); the NASA Valkyrie or R5 robot, which is being
tested in Australia (source: https://x.com/CWeezyeth/status/1643599326650986496/photo/1); and a range of humanoid
industrial robots from Persona AI; a miner, builder, welder, fabricator and assembler (source: https://personainc.ai).
of freedom, is 173cm tall and weighs
70kg. It is already being used to produce Xpeng cars – see Fig.48.
Kuavo 4.0
www.lejurobot.com/en
Kuavo is a product of Leju Robotics,
designed as a general-purpose humanoid robot for applications such as personal assistance and industrial automation (Fig.45). It utilises Huawei’s
HarmonyOS and PanGu multimodal
large language model for AI.
It is not clear if Kuavo uses it, but
other products of this company are
the world’s first to use 5G-A positioning, which uses 5G technology for
high-precision location within indoor
spaces.
NASA
The 2011 NASA Robonaut2 or R2
was the first humanoid in space, tested
aboard the International Space Station
(ISS). It was initially only a torso, but a
mobility platform was added in 2014.
It had significant technical problems,
was not used and returned to Earth
in 2018.
The NASA Valkyrie (see Fig.46),
also known as R5, is still under active
development. It is also being tested
in Australia by Woodside Energy
“to develop remote mobile dexterous manipulation capabilities for
uncrewed and offshore energy facilities”. It is 1.8m tall, weighs 136kg and
runs on three Intel Core i7 CPUs. It is
not currently deployed in space.
Nurabot
www.foxconn.com/en-us
Foxconn, in cooperation with
NVIDIA, has developed a robotic nurse
with Tawian’s Taichung Veterans General Hospital called Nurabot (Fig.49).
It has perception, navigation, understands language and has an ability to
adapt.
It is intended to address labour
shortages, monitor patients’ vital
signs, address caregiver burnout,
move patients, deliver meals and
medication, offer companionship,
turn patients over in bed and learn
patients’ habits. It does this with high-
resolution sensors, autonomous navigation capabilities and NLP (natural
language processing).
In trials, the nurses love it because
it takes over repetitive tasks and gives
them more time for non-routine tasks.
Patients like it as well, as the robot is
always there for them.
Optimus
www.tesla.com/en_eu/AI
Tesla has developed the Optimus
Gen 2 general purpose humanoid robot
Fig.48: Xpeng’s Iron robot making cars. Source: https://baa. Fig.49: the Nurabot nursing robot. Source: www.honhai.
yiche.com/xiaopengP7jia/thread-51117011.html
com/en-us/press-center/press-releases/latest-news/1605
24
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
Fig.50: the Optimus robot
through various design
iterations. Left to right,
they are Bumblebee
(September 2022),
Optimus Gen 1 (March
2023), Gen 2 (December
2023) and Gen 3 (current).
Source: https://x.com/
niccruzpatane/status/
1937798034894762071/
photo/1
shown in Fig.50. The status of Gen 3
shown in that figure is unclear.
Optimus uses Tesla’s in-house AI
and uses parts of Tesla cars, such as
the same computers, with custom-
designed chips to provide the robot’s
neural networks for tasks like locomotion, manipulation, navigation, vision
processing and decision-making. Tthe
same AI architecture as Tesla’s Autopilot and FSD systems.
It uses the same cameras as Tesla
cars for vision processing, actuators
based on design principles developed for the cars, and the same 4680
batteries used in the Cybertruck. The
neural networks used by Optimus are
the same as used by Tesla cars to process visual inputs and adapt to environments. It also uses the same deep
learning and auto-labelling techniques
used by vehicles.
Using its neural network, it can
learn from videos of humans performing various tasks such as vacuuming,
stirring food, disposing of rubbish or
moving items on a factory floor.
Elon Musk has previously shared a
vision of collective learning and data
sharing in Tesla’s AI and robotics initiatives, so the possibility exists that
when one Optimus robot learns a new
skill, they could all learn it, depending on the programming.
Some critics have pointed out that
early demonstration videos of Optimus involved teleoperation by human
siliconchip.com.au
operators. Tesla is currently using two
Optimus robots in its factories for tasks
like moving batteries, but they currently operate at half the efficiency of
human workers.
They intend to produce 1000 robots
by the end of 2025, to be used by Tesla,
with sales to other companies starting
in 2026. The estimated cost per unit
is US$20,000 to US$30,000 ($30,000
to $45,000).
There has been discussion of controlling an Optimus robot via patients
with the Neuralink brain-computer
interface implant. This means a disabled person could ‘inhabit’ the body
of an Optimus robot and control it to
perform tasks by thought alone.
It has also been proposed that such
a person could control just parts of the
robot, such as the arms, legs or hands,
which could be attached to the body as
artificial limbs. A patient named Alex
has already demonstrated the ability
to control an Optimus hand through
Neuralink, via thought alone; see the
video at siliconchip.au/link/ac7n
Optimus has been integrated with
X’s Grok AI, so it will be possible to
have conversations with the robot and
to get the Optimus to do anything as
commanded by the operator. It may
also be able to provide companionship.
PAL Robotics
https://pal-robotics.com
This Spanish firm makes a range of
Australia's electronics magazine
robots, including bipedal humanoid
types such as the REEM-C, TALOS and
Kangaroo research platforms for robotics and AI research. They also make
the ARI wheeled social robot for tasks
like answering customer enquiries or
running promotional campaigns.
It uses AI, running on Ubuntu and
the ROS framework, with facial recognition and other visualisation tools.
Persona AI
https://personainc.ai
Persona AI in Houston are developing a range of heavy-duty industrial humanoid robots, based on one
modular platform but customised for
a variety of tasks including shipbuilding and welding – see Fig.47. One of
the strengths of their robots is their
advanced hands, derived from work
by NASA.
The firm was
co-founded by
ex-NASA staff. One
usage model for these
robots includes renting
them out for specific
jobs. For deployment
for precision shipyard
welding, they have a
development partnership with HD Hyundai
Robotics, Vazil and HD
Korea Shipbuilding &
Offshore Engineering,
and are expected to be
deployed in 2027.
December 2025 25
Phoenix
www.sanctuary.ai
A robot from Canadian company
Sanctuary AI (Fig.51), according to
the company, Phoenix, running under
their Carbon AI control system, “mimics subsystems found in the human
brain, such as memory, sight, sound,
and touch”. See the video at https://
youtu.be/-HizP4UQvug for more information.
Fig.51: the upper
body of the
Phoenix robot.
Fig.54: the OP3 robot. Source:
https://en.robotis.com/sub/
business_platform_
op3.php
Fig.52: the EngineAI PM01 in service
as an experimental police robot.
Source: South China Morning Post –
siliconchip.au/link/ac7q
Fig.55: a
robot hand
from Shadow Robot.
Source: https://shadowrobot.
com/dexterous-hand-series
Fig.56:
SoftBank
Robotics’ NAO.
PM01
www.engineai.com.cn
EngineAI makes the PM01 general-
purpose humanoid robot. Chinese
police are using one in an experimental and demonstration role (see
Fig.52). In police work, it can perform
facial recognition and crowd scanning, although at this stage of development, it is not likely to be intelligent enough to be genuinely useful
for police work.
Still, it hints at a possible RoboCoplike future. See the video at https://
youtu.be/vu930qj9CEI
Poppy Project www.poppy-project.org
An open-source platform for the creation, use and sharing of interactive
3D-printed robots for education, artists, scientists and hackers (see Fig.53).
Porton Man Robotic Test System
The Porton Man Robotic Test System (siliconchip.au/link/ac7j) is a
humanoid robot for the US Army.
Its purpose is to wear and test
nuclear, biological and chemical
(NBC) protective suits. It performs
tasks that soldiers would perform,
such as walking, running, kneeling, or
laying prone while wearing the equipment and has 100 embedded sensors
to test for leaks and to measure other
parameters.
Its main advantage is the ability to
repeat movements precisely, enabling
effective comparisons between different NBC ensembles.
RoboPrime humanoid project
RoboPrime is a very low-cost
3D-printed humanoid robot project for
the enthusiast. The website at https://
github.com/simonepri/roboprime is
no longer actively maintained; however, builders might still find some
ideas there.
Fig.53: the Poppy Humanoid v1.0.2
is 83cm tall, weighs 3.5kg, has 25
actuators and runs Odroid XU4 with
Ubuntu 14.04. Source: www.poppyproject.org/en/robots/poppy-humanoid
Fig.57: SoftBank
Robotics’
Pepper.
26
Australia's electronics magazine
Silicon Chip
ROBOTIS
https://en.robotis.com
This Korean robot company makes
open-source humanoid platforms,
such as the OP3 (Fig.54), for research
siliconchip.com.au
Humanoid robots losing control
There were recent incidents of humanoid robots losing control, which can
happen, just like any other machine. There is obvious potential for this to
harm people. That is why it is imperative that these robots are built with failsafe systems and some means for their handlers to deactivate them. You
can see one such incident in the video at https://youtu.be/1eYZr9vdGl8
Legal concerns for AI
There are no specific laws governing AI in Australia. In the event that AI and
humanoid robots become sufficiently advanced to develop consciousness,
it has been argued that they should be afforded rights as humans have.
However, they are still man-made machines that mimic humans and still not
human, just very advanced appliances.
In regards to foundation models, polls of organisations have suggested
that there is agreement that those who develop the models should be
responsible for the risks, not those who use the models.
and education purposes. You can find
the relevant files at siliconchip.au/
link/ac7k
Shadow Robot Company
The Shadow Robot company
(https://shadowrobot.com) specialises
in making dextrous robot hands for
other robotics manufacturers. One of
their robot hands is shown in Fig.55.
SoftBank
www.softbankrobotics.com
SoftBank Robotics offer two humanoid robots, NAO and Pepper. NAO
(Fig.56) is described a teaching assistant. It is described as having a personality and an ability to inspire students
from all ages, from preschool to university, including the ability to work
with special-needs children.
It is described as being able to connect “theory to practice with hands-on
Fig.58: Sophia by Hanson Robotics.
Source: www.hansonrobotics.com/
sophia
siliconchip.com.au
projects that encourage participation,
teamwork, and creative problem-
solving”. NAO can speak 20 languages,
move naturally and runs on the Linuxbased NAOqi OS, a flexible framework
that gives a lot of options for customising the robot. It is quite small at around
57cm tall, with a weight of 4.8kg.
Pepper (Fig.57) is a robot designed
to greet customers in a business. It can
make personalised recommendations,
help people find what they’re looking
for, sell to and interact with humans.
Pepper is 1.2m tall, weighs 28kg, runs
for 12 hours on one charge, has a variety of sensors, runs on the NAOqi OS
and can be customised with various
SDKs (software development kits).
carry on human-like conversations.
The manufacturer describes Sophia as
“a human-crafted science fiction character depicting the future of AI and
robotics, and a platform for advanced
robotics and AI research”.
The robot has made appearances on
many popular TV shows. Sophia utilises symbolic AI, neural networks,
expert systems, machine perception,
conversational natural language processing, adaptive motor control and
cognitive architecture systems, among
others.
The manufacturer says that the robot
has demonstrated rudimentary levels
of consciousness under certain conditions using the Tononi Phi system of
measuring consciousness (siliconchip.
au/link/ac7l).
StUWArt
A 140cm-tall experimental humanoid robot from the University of Western Australia (UWA; siliconchip.au/
link/ac7m) – see Fig.59. It uses a commercial robot platform, with the focus
of UWA research being on the development by students of autonomous
control software enabling it to move
and walk.
The basic platform appears to be a
Unitree G1, described below.
Sophia
www.hansonrobotics.com
A humanoid robot by Hong-Kongbased Hanson Robotics (Fig.58). It can
Titan
www.roboforce.ai
RoboForce has developed the Titan
industrial robot, which can lift 40kg
and place it with 1mm accuracy, running for eight hours on one charge –
see Fig.60. The robots are modular and
can be equipped with different hands
Fig.59: the StUWArt humanoid robot
with software under development by
UWA students.
Fig.60: the Titan-T industrial robot by
RoboForce. Source: www.roboforce.
ai/product
Australia's electronics magazine
December 2025 27
and bases. It is optimised to perform
the five so-called primitive actions of
all human labour: pick, place, press,
twist and connect.
Fig.61: the Unitree G1 robot.
Source: www.unitree.com/g1
Fig.62: the soccer-playing version of the Unitree G1, the G1-Comp. Source:
www.unitree.com/robocup
Toyota Research Institute
Toyota sees its future with large
numbers of its workers being humanoid robots. The Toyota Research
Institute has partnered with Boston Dynamics to integrate its ‘large
behaviour models’ with Boston’s
Atlas robot. Toyota has trained their
in-house AI large behaviour model
to perform 500 tasks, to be integrated
with Atlas.
Toyota trains their large behaviour
models using humans to demonstrate
the required tasks, with joysticks to
control robot movement, or robots are
trained using videos. The AI model
then synthesises these experienced
operations into the relevant actions.
Toyota envisions using the robots
for tasks such as transporting parts,
assembling components and conducting inspections.
They may eventually replace
between 5% and 15% of human workers. There is a video about Toyota’s
large language models at https://youtu.
be/DeLpnTgzJT4
Unitree G1 robot
www.unitree.com
Standing at 130cm tall, and weighing 35kg, the G1 has a swappable battery pack with a life of two hours,
three-finger hands with optional tactile sensor arrays, 3D lidar and depth
cameras, a microphone, speakers, 43
degrees of freedom, eight CPUs and
other features – see Fig.61.
Another version of this robot, the
G1-Comp, is designed for playing in
robot soccer competitions (Fig.62).
The G1-Comp uses the YOLOv11
algorithm for real-time object detection and recognition, pose estimation
and image classification using convolutional neural networks. The H1 is
similar to the G1 but is taller (180cm).
See the videos at https://youtu.be/
GzX1qOIO1bE (G1) and https://youtu.
be/M0KrTumJBFc (G1-Comp).
Fig.63: the Walker S Lite (left) and Walker S. Source: www.ubtrobot.com/en/
humanoid/products/WalkerS
Walker S
www.ubtrobot.com
The Chinese UBTECH Walker S
Industrial Humanoid Robot assists
on production lines with inspections
and installing small parts. It comes in
two models: the Walker S (170cm tall,
65kg, 41 degrees of freedom, 2.5 hour
battery) and the Walker S Lite (130cm
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
28
Silicon Chip
What is AIoT?
AIoT or artificial intelligence of things is like the internet of things (IoT),
where devices can communicate with each other. However, each device
also possesses artificial intelligence. The combination of IoT and AI in AIoT
makes for an extremely powerful network, where AI-powered devices can
interact and communicate with each other locally, area-wide, country-wide
or even worldwide.
It could conceivably be dangerous in the future, if not managed
appropriately, with limitations to stop AI getting out of control. Just imagine
an army of robots being programmed with malicious intent…
Glossary of Terms
AI – Artificial Intelligence; machines
simulating human intelligence, such as
learning, reasoning and problem-solving
ANN – Artificial Neural Network;
computational models inspired by
human brains, used in machine learning
ASIC – Application-Specific Integrated
Circuit; a custom-designed chip
optimised for a specific function or task
CNN – Convolutional Neural Network; deep
tall, 63kg, 41 degrees of freedom, two
hour battery) – see Fig.63.
Features of the Walker S include
all-terrain autonomous adaptation,
robust self-balancing, multi-modal
large model-based decision making, hand-eye coordination and
whole body manipulation, U-SLAM
(UBTECH simultaneous location and
mapping), 3D point cloud semantic
navigation, human and environment
comprehensive perception and multimodal human-robot interaction.
It runs on Robot Operating System,
Linux ROSA 2.0, supports teleoperation and AIoT (artificial intelligence
of things).
For more information, see the videos at https://youtu.be/UCt7qPpTt-g
and siliconchip.au/link/ac7o
carpentry, 3D concrete printing and
other tasks – see Fig.64. It is intended
to address a shortage of skilled construction workers and to reduce
human injuries.
Zyrex
https://ricrobotics.com
This 6m-tall AI robot for construction sites from the Californian company RIC Robotics is yet to be released,
but is designed to perform welding,
Further viewing
The smallest humanoid robot
The world’s smallest humanoid
robot is 57.7mm tall and was built
by Tatsuhiko Mitsuya at the Nagoya
Institute of Technology in Japan – see
Fig.65.
Upgrading humanoid robots
AI is progressing rapidly. Since AI
is software-based, it is usually possible to upgrade a humanoid robot to
make it smarter as new AI software is
released, thus protecting the investment in robot hardware.
A fascinating look at “The Proto-
Robots of Antiquity” is available in
the YouTube video at https://youtu.
SC
be/0QGkf13fVs4
learning models optimised for vision,
detecting edges, shapes and patterns
CPU – Central Processing Unit; a general-
purpose processor that executes
instructions & manages computing tasks
DoF – Degrees of Freedom; independent
movements a robot joint or mechanism
can perform
End Effector – a tool/device at a robotic
arm’s end that interacts with objects
FPGA – Field-Programmable Gate Array;
a chip programmable for specific
hardware tasks post-manufacturing
GPU – Graphics Processing Unit; a
processor specialised for highly parallel
tasks like machine learning
LLM – Large Language Model; an AI model
trained on massive text datasets to
generate or understand language
Multimodal – An AI that processes and
integrates multiple data types (text,
images, audio, video etc)
Neuromorphic Processor – a chip
that uses artificial neurons to mimic the
human brain
NLP – Natural Language Processing; an
AI’s ability to understand, interpret and
generate human language
Organoid – a simplified version of an
organ designed to imitate it
RTOS – Real-Time Operating System; an
operating system that guarantees timely
processing for critical tasks
Fig.64: the giant Zyrex
construction robot,
compared to a human-sized
robot at lower left. The robot
is not fully humanoid like the
others in this article – but it
has some similarities. Source:
Robotics & Automation News
– siliconchip.au/link/ac7r
Fig.65: the world’s
smallest humanoid
robot.
Tactel – Tactile Element; a sensor element
that detects touch, pressure or texture
information
Teleoperation – operating a machine
remotely
TPU – Tensor Processing Unit; a Google-
designed chip optimised for accelerating
machine learning workloads.
Transformer – a neural network
architecture that uses attention to
process sequential data efficiently
VLA – Vision-Language Action; an AI that
combines visual input and language to
perform actions or tasks
VLM – Vision-Language Model; an AI that
combines image understanding with text
comprehension and generation
siliconchip.com.au
Australia's electronics magazine
December 2025 29
By Andrew Levido
Power
Electronics
Part 2: Controlling DC-DC Converters
Last month, we introduced average value analysis and used it to analyse a range of
DC-DC converter topologies at a high level. We then looked at a practical example of a
buck converter. This time, we will delve into the control systems required to make these
converters work correctly.
D
C-DC converters almost always operate
in a closed-loop mode, where some
kind of feedback is used to maintain the output voltage at the desired
level, despite changes in load or source
voltage. Often, the detail of the control
loop is hidden from the user because
it is incorporated in the driver chip,
such as was the case for our buck converter example last month.
Even when this is the case, it is
handy to have at least a basic understanding of how they work.
We will continue using the example
of the buck converter we introduced
last time. It was designed to convert a
nominal 12V input (ranging from 10V
to 14V) to a 6V output, to drive a 10W
load for a maximum output current of
600mA. The switching frequency was
500kHz. We went through the process
of selecting the filter components in
some detail.
If you want to know why we need
to close the loop around our converter,
take a look at Fig.1. This is the result of
a simulation of the converter with no
feedback and a fixed 50% duty cycle.
The source voltage (blue trace) is
programmed to be 12V for the first
30ms, dropping to 10V thereafter. In
contrast, the load is programmed to be
10W for the first 10ms, increasing to
20W thereafter, with the resulting load
current shown by the orange trace. The
purple trace shows the output voltage.
There is a significant transient when
the load changes, but no change in
output voltage, since the duty cycle
is fixed. The transient peaks at about
±300mV, which is not great, and it
takes about 5ms to settle.
Things get even worse when the
input voltage reduces at the 30ms
mark. Not only does the output voltage drop because there is no regulation, but the ringing at the transition is
horrendous. Again, it takes about 5ms
for the result to settle into something
close to the steady state value.
A properly designed closed-loop
control system should greatly reduce
or eliminate these problems.
Control theory is a huge topic, and
one that can be very heavy on mathematics. I will therefore not be giving
a control theory tutorial in the classical sense, but rather a practical exploration of some of the techniques that
can be employed. If you are a control
theory expert, you are hereby warned
that I am going to skip some details in
the interest of space and simplicity!
Creating a mathematical
model
Fig.1: without a closed loop control system, the output of the DC-DC converter
(purple trace) is unstable with changes in load (at 10ms) and input voltage (at
30ms).
To create a stable and effective control system, we have to build a mathematical model to describe our DC-DC
converter under dynamic conditions.
We have already discussed two models
for our converter: the very high-level
periodic steady state (PSS) model we
used for average value analysis, and
the very low-level cycle-by-cycle simulation model we used to verify the
ripple voltages and currents.
We can’t use the periodic steadystate model for the control loop since
it is dynamic behaviour we want to
take care of. Also, we don’t need to
model the cycle-by-cycle behaviour of
the converter since the behaviour we
are concerned with occurs over much
longer time periods than a single 2µs
cycle. Instead, we need an intermediate model.
Fig.2 shows the block diagram of
our converter with feedback presented
in the classic control theory manner.
Right in the middle is the modulator,
which takes a control voltage proportional to the duty cycle (vc) and
produces the switching waveform,
whose average value, ‹vx›, is applied
to the filter.
The filter takes this voltage and produces the smoothed output voltage, vo.
Each block has a gain, G, which relates
its output signal to its input.
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
30
Silicon Chip
In front of these two blocks is
Fig.2: this classic
a compensator, which we will
depiction of the
describe in more detail below.
DC-DC converter
The input to the compensator is
closed-loop
an error, e, that is the difference
system is useful
between the reference setpoint vr
to understand
and the feedback signal vfb. The
the circuit
feedback signal is derived from the
blocks we need
output voltage we want to control
to model.
by some sensor, with a gain of H.
Fig.3: the DCThese blocks are shown in a
DC converter
more familiar way in Fig.3. The
arranged
modulator includes the Mosfet and
according to the
diode switches, plus the circuitry
block diagram
that converts a control voltage to
in Fig.2 is the
pulse-width-modulation to drive
starting point for
the Mosfet. At its simplest, this is
the development
just a comparator with an output
of a control
that is high whenever the control
model of the
voltage exceeds a ramp waveform
converter. The
compensator is
at the switching frequency.
the missing piece
The modulator therefore takes a
of the puzzle at
control voltage, vc, and produces
this stage.
the average voltage, ‹vx›. The modulator has a gain of Gm and it is easy
to see that this must be the unitless negative input for the feedback. This
quantity Gm = Vsrc/Vramp. If we assume anticipates that the compensator will
the ramp voltage is 1V, the modulator probably involve op amps.
gain simplifies to the source voltage,
Simplifying the complexwhich is 12 in our example.
It is worth noting that there is no frequency domain
need for any switching to occur in this
Describing the filter and compenmodel of the modulator. The modu- sator gains requires us to dip our toes
lator produces an output equal to the into something called the complex-
average voltage over one switching frequency domain, also known as the
period. This voltage may vary with s-domain. Analysis of the behaviour
time, but the time scale we are con- of capacitors and inductors involves
cerned about is much longer than the differential equations, which we usu2µs switching period.
ally describe in the time domain – for
Because this modulator controls the example, the relationship between
average voltage applied to the filter, voltage and current in an inductor is
this converter is said to be employ- v = L di/dt.
ing voltage mode control. There is
We can describe the same equations
another way to do it, which we will in the s-domain, which makes the
come to later.
mathematics much simpler, because
The sensor gain is trivial to calcu- differentiation is reduced to multilate. It is simply the divider ratio rep- plication and integration is reduced
resented by the two resistors, so Hs = to division. The conversion from the
R1 ÷ (R1 + R2), or 0.204 in this case. time domain to the s-domain requires
The buffer is there to isolate the com- something called a Laplace transform.
pensator from the divider.
You don’t need to know how to do
We will ignore the compensator for this (unless you are an electrical engithe moment, but notice that I have neering student) because you can write
absorbed the error summing junc- the s-domain expression for most comtion into the black box and added a mon components very easily without
positive input for the reference and a having to do any maths.
Table 1 – passive component complex impedances
Component
Time Domain
s-Domain
Complex Impedance Z(s)
Inductor
v = L di/dt
v = iLs
Ls
Capacitor
i = C dv/dt
i = vCs
1/Cs
Resistor
v = Ri
v = ir
R
siliconchip.com.au
Australia's electronics magazine
The “s” in s-domain is a complex
frequency, which is just a way of
describing a unit-amplitude sinewave
with a given frequency and phase. We
won’t, however, have to deal with any
complex numbers in this explanation
– we can simply treat s like any other
algebraic variable.
To transform the inductor mentioned above to the s-domain, the time
differential (d/dt) is simply replaced by
s to get the s-domain equivalent relationship v = i • L • s, which I hope
you can see is kind of analogous to
Ohm’s law. The complex impedance
of the inductor, indicated by Z(s), is
therefore simply Ls.
Using a similar logic, we can arrive
at the s-domain expressions for the
voltage/current relationships of common parts, and hence their complex
impedances, shown in Table 1.
To show just how useful this transformation is, we will use these complex impedances to calculate the transfer function of a simple RC low-pass
filter shown at the top of Fig.4. If you
substitute in the complex impedances
from the table and use the normal
voltage divider equation, you get the
s-domain transfer function 1 ÷ (RCs +
1) after a little bit of algebraic manipulation. It’s that easy.
Poles and zeros
You can see that there must be a
particular value of complex frequency
s that makes the denominator of the
December 2025 31
expression equal zero, and therefore
the transfer function becomes undefined (but very large). This value, s = -1
÷ (RC), is called a “pole” because you
can visualise it as a spike rising to infinity on the two-dimensional s-plane.
The complex frequency domain
uses radians per second as the unit of
frequency, but converting to Hertz (via
the relationship that one cycle is 2π
radians), this pole is at a frequency of
1 ÷ (2πRC)Hz. This should be familiar
as the corner frequency of an RC filter.
If we turn to the RC high-pass filter
at the bottom of Fig.4 and go through
the same process, we arrive at the
s-
domain transfer function RCs ÷
(RCs + 1). This too has a single pole,
at –1 ÷ RC, but the s in the numerator means there is also a value of s
where the numerator of the fraction
becomes zero, so the transfer function
is equal to zero.
It may come as no surprise to know
that this is called a “zero”. In this case,
the zero occurs at s = 0, so the LC highpass filter has a transfer function with
one pole at 1 ÷ (2πRC) and one zero at
the origin. By origin, we really mean
the origin of the s-plane, but you can
think of this zero as being at “0Hz”.
So, you can easily work out the poles
& zeroes of any network by calculating
the transfer function in the s-domain
as a fraction. Poles are the values of
s (frequency) when the denominator
is zero, and zeroes are the values of s
when the numerator is zero.
Poles & zeros have a specific meaning in the frequency domain. When a
signal encounters a pole, the slope of
the gain reduces by −20dB/decade and
the phase shifts by −90°. Conversely,
when a signal encounters a zero, the
slope of its gain increases by 20dB/
decade and the phase shifts by +90°.
Fig.5 shows this in action for the
two filters we just analysed. In the
case of the low-pass filter, the signal
is unattenuated and has a phase shift
of zero until it encounters the pole at
which point it turns down to a slope of
−20dB per decade. At the same time,
the phase shifts by −90°.
Fig.4: finding the s-domain
transfer functions for
these filters is as simple as
substituting the expressions
from Table 1 into the voltage
divider equation and
performing some elementary
algebra.
In the case of the high-pass filter, the
zero at the origin means that the gain is
increasing by +20dB per decade from
‘zero’ and the phase is already shifted
by +90°. When the pole is encountered,
the −20dB/decade shift puts the gain
back to flat, and the −90° shift brings
the phase back to zero.
In practice, this means that you can
work out the transfer function, the
pole and zero locations and therefore
the gain/phase versus frequency characteristic of any network of resistors,
capacitors and inductors with a bit of
high-school algebra. No wonder engineers like the s-domain. Thanks, Monsieur Laplace!
Buck converter output filter
Armed with this new knowledge,
we are ready to work out the transfer
function, Gf, of the buck converter’s
output filter to fill out our control system model. This is shown on the lefthand side of Fig.6.
If you have a go at this yourself, you
will see I have made a small approximation in the denominator, where an
RCs term is dropped because it is very
much smaller that the dominant RLs2
term. This kind of simplification is
common in complex frequency analysis, so watch out for them.
The resulting transfer function has
an s2 term in the denominator. This
signifies that the transfer function has
two poles; in this case, both are at 1
÷ (2π√LC). This means the roll-off at
this frequency is −40dB/decade, and
the phase shifts by −180°.
There is also one zero at 1 ÷ 2πRC
due to the ESR of the of the capacitance.
This pulls the gain back up to −20dB/
decade and the phase back up to −90°.
This double-pole is a problem for
our converter. Gain ‘peaking’, like that
shown dotted due to the Q of the LC
filter, and the rapid phase transition
can cause instability like the ringing
we saw in Fig.1. If we compare this
plot to the simulation on the righthand side of Fig.6, you can see that the
peaking extends to about 15dB, which
is potentially quite serious.
Designing a compensator
Fig.5: the poles and zeros obtained from the s-domain transfer functions
in Fig.4 can be easily transferred to the frequency response plots. A pole
introduces a −20dB/decade slope change and a −90° phase shift. A zero
32introduces
Silicon
Chip
Australia's
electronics
a +20dB/decade
slope change and
a +90° phase
shift. magazine
Finally, we come to the design of the
compensator. There are several ways
to go about this, but they all come
down to manipulating the poles and
zeros of the closed-loop transfer function. Their number, position and relationship can be tweaked to ensure the
siliconchip.com.au
Fig.6: the DC-DC converter output
filter has two poles at a frequency
determined by the inductance and
capacitance, and a zero at the
frequency of the capacitance and its
ESR. The resulting frequency response
contains a nasty peak & steep phase
shift responsible for the ringing in
Fig.1.
Fig.7: we create a compensator
characteristic (▪) to transform the
filter response into the dominant pole
characteristic (▪). The compensator
requires two poles & two zeroes.
system is stable and to optimise the
transient response.
For example, if we are most worried about overshoot, we can set up a
highly damped system that will eliminate it at the expense of response time
and settling time. On the other hand,
we might be concerned about getting
to the new voltage quickly, and can
therefore tolerate a bit of overshoot.
I’m not going to dig into all of that
here. Instead, I will demonstrate a simple technique called dominant-pole
compensation that focuses on the
open-loop poles and zeros. This is
the same technique used to ensure op
amps are stable in closed-loop applications.
The aim is to make the open-loop
frequency response look like a single-
pole filter that rolls off the gain at a
steady −20dB/decade until it reaches
0dB at some crossover frequency, fc.
This roll-off is required to ensure the
gain drops to unity well before the
phase shift reaches −180°.
The difference between the phase
shift at the crossover frequency and
−180° is the ‘phase margin’, a measure of the stability of the circuit and
its tolerance to external disturbances.
We can achieve this roll-off by adding a compensator with the characteristics shown in Fig.7. The modulator
siliconchip.com.au
and the sensor gains are not frequency-
dependent, so they don’t impact the
shape of the gain/frequency characteristic of the open-loop converter, and
can be ignored. They do impact the
absolute value of the gain, but we are
not concerned with that here.
If we want to transform the filter
gain/frequency characteristic (in red)
into the dominant pole characteristic
in blue, we require the compensator to
have the green characteristic.
It should have a pole at the origin,
to set the roll-off to −20dB/decade.
We then need two zeroes at the corner
frequency of the LC filter to cancel the
double-pole in the filter response. The
Fig.8: this Type III compensator has
the necessary poles and zeroes. The
transfer function is calculated in
exactly the same way as for the filter;
the component values are discussed in
the text.
Australia's electronics magazine
compensator should have another pole
at the frequency of the output capacitance/ESR zero to cancel the corresponding zero in the filter.
So in total, we need a compensator
with two zeroes and two poles, one of
which is at the origin.
This is known as a Type III compensator, and a suitable circuit is shown in
Fig.8. The reference voltage is applied
to the non-inverting input of the op
amp, and the feedback signal is applied
to the inverting input via R3/C3.
You can work out the compensator’s
transfer function in the s-domain in
exactly the same way as we did for the
filter. This time, we just assume that
vr is zero, and use the usual equation
for the gain of an inverting amplifier:
G = −Zf /Zi, where Zf is the impedance
of C2 in parallel with R1 plus C1, and
Zi is the impedance of R3 in parallel
with C3.
The resulting transfer function
(again with a minor simplification)
is shown below the circuit diagram.
There are two zeros, one formed by
R1C1 and one by R3C3, and two poles,
one at the origin and one formed by
R1C2.
The component values shown are
calculated by setting the frequency
of both zeroes, 1 ÷ (2πR1C1) and 1 ÷
(2πR3C3), to be the same as the LC
December 2025 33
seems likely the chip uses a similar
compensator internally.
Current-mode control
Fig.9: compare this closed-loop response to that of Fig.1. The disturbances when
the load or supply voltage change are much smaller and settle much faster.
The lower graph shows the open loop gain and phase with the compensator
included. Contrast this with the filter characteristic in Fig.6.
filter’s 1 ÷ (2π√LC), which is 1.56kHz.
I chose 100nF and 1kW for nice, round
values.
The non-origin pole at 1 ÷ (2πR1C2)
should be at the same frequency as the
zero formed by the output capacitor
and its ESR (20.4kHz). Since we have
already chosen R1, we can calculate
C2 to be 7.8nF. This is not a standard
value, so I used 8.2nF, the nearest one.
This small error won’t make a huge
difference, since the values for output capacitance and ESR we are using
(102.4µF and 76mW) are hardly precision values themselves.
Simulation
I simulated this control circuit to
see how it will perform. The result is
shown at the top of Fig.9. The stimulus
is exactly the same as for Fig.1 – the
load resistance changes from 10W to
20W at the 10ms mark, and the source
34
Silicon Chip
voltage drops from 12V to 10V at the
30ms mark.
The difference is dramatic. There
is just a small blip at the 10ms mark,
which peaks at about +20mV (+0.3%),
and lasts for just 150µs. At the 30ms
mark, the voltage dips about 130mV
when the input changes, but it recovers
without overshoot in around 600µs.
I ran a second simulation to plot
the open-loop gain of the entire circuit, which is shown at the bottom of
Fig.9. While you can clearly see the
expected -20dB/decade roll-off from
100Hz to 100kHz, a small amount of
gain peaking is still visible, but it is
much less pronounced. The simulation also calculates the crossover frequency, which is 4.36kHz, and the
phase margin, which is 66°.
You may recall that the crossover
frequency we calculated from the
TPS5410 data sheet was 4.5kHz, so it
Australia's electronics magazine
We mentioned above that there is
a second type of modulator that can
be used in DC-DC converters. This is
known as current-mode control, and
it is shown in Fig.10. In this case, the
modulator controls the average current
through the inductor, ‹il›, instead of
the average voltage at the filter input.
At the beginning of every switching
period T, the latch is set, so the Mosfet switches on and the inductor current begins to increase. This current is
monitored by a current sensor, usually
a resistor, and the resulting voltage is
compared to the control voltage, vc.
When the current reaches the level
defined by the control voltage, the
latch is reset and the Mosfet switches
off until the next cycle.
The result is that the peak current
is determined by the control voltage
and the value of the sense resistor. If
the current ripple is small, this turns
out to be a reasonable approximation
to the average current. This approximation is not perfect, so most real-life
implementations use something called
slope compensation to avoid a potential instability at very high duty cycles.
This is not relevant for the discussion below, so I will not go into it here.
Editor’s note: see the LED Dazzler
project (February 2011; siliconchip.
au/Article/899) for a practical implementation of slope compensation in a
switch-mode regulator.
The transfer function of a current
mode modulator is therefore approximated by Gm = 1 ÷ Rsense. Note that this
gain is a transconductance (a voltage to
current conversion). Because the output of the modulator is now a current,
we have to revisit the transfer function
of the output filter and the compensator, since the filter is no longer the
voltage divider we modelled earlier.
Fig.11 shows the calculation of the
filter transfer function, which is performed in exactly the same way as
before. What is different is that the
inductor is effectively irrelevant, since
the modulator current passes through
it (you can think of the inductor as part
of the modulator if that helps).
The output voltage is now dependent on the impedance of the filter
capacitor, including its ESR, and the
impedance of the load.
The upshot of this is that the transfer
siliconchip.com.au
function is simpler, with a single pole
at a frequency dependent on the output capacitance and the load resistance, and a zero at the frequency
related to the capacitance and its ESR,
like before.
It follows that our compensator can
be simpler, as it now needs only two
poles and one zero, as shown at the
bottom of Fig.11. This is known as a
Type II compensator, and an example
is shown in Fig.12.
The component values of R1 & C1
are calculated so that the frequency of
the zero (1 ÷ 2πR1C1) is the same as
the zero formed by the output capacitor and the load, at 1 ÷ 2πRloadC,
which is 156Hz.
The pole at 1 ÷ 2πR1C2 should be at
the same frequency as the zero formed
by the output capacitor and its ESR
(20.4kHz). Given that R1 is 10kW, the
closest standard capacitor value comes
out to be 820pF. The value of R3 should
be very low compared to R1, and can
even be zero.
I simulated this converter as well,
although in this case, a change in input
voltage was not modelled. Fig.14 on
page 36 shows the results with a much
magnified scale. The peak excursion
and recovery time are very similar to
the voltage mode controller, as we
would expect.
Discontinuous current
Before we finish with control theory
for now, we have to cover one more
topic. So far, we have assumed that
the current through the converter is
continuous. That is, we have assumed
the peak-to-peak current is small compared to the average. But what happens as the average inductor drops
to the point it is close to the peak-topeak ripple?
Fig.13 shows our old friend, the buck
converter, where we have plotted the
inductor current and the voltage vx that
we have used in all of our analyses.
On the left is the case when the
inductor current is high enough that
the negative excursion of the (exaggerated) current ripple remains positive.
This is known as the continuous current case, and has been the assumption
we have used to derive the modulator
models for both voltage mode and current mode examples above.
We could, however, imagine a situation when the load and therefore
inductor current reduces to the point
that the inductor current ramps down
siliconchip.com.au
Fig.10: a
current-mode
modulator
controls the
average inductor
current instead
of the average
voltage as in
Fig.3. This
change flows on
to the filter and
compensator
transfer
functions.
Fig.11: the current-mode filter
transfer function is simpler, with just
one pole set by the capacitor and
the load resistance and one zero due
to the capacitor and its ESR. The
compensator therefore only needs
two poles and one zero.
Fig.12: this Type II compensator
has the requisite poles (one at the
origin) and one zero to compensate
the current-mode controller. See the
text for the component values.
Fig.13: discontinuous mode occurs when the current reaches zero before the
end of the switching period. This changes the modulator transfer function,
and thus the compensator is required for optimum performance.
Australia's electronics magazine
December 2025 35
Fig.14: the resulting closed-loop response to a load change is similar to that of
the voltage mode controller (albeit with a different scale).
Silicon Chip kcaBBack Issues
$10.00 + post
$11.50 + post
$12.50 + post
$13.00 + post
$14.00 + post
January 1997 to October 2021
November 2021 to September 2023
October 2023 to September 2024
October 2024 onwards
September 2025 onwards
All back issues after February 2015 are in stock, while most from January 1997 to
December 2014 are available. For a full list of all available issues, visit: siliconchip.com.
au/Shop/2
PDF versions are available for all issues at siliconchip.com.au/Shop/12
We also sell photocopies of individual articles for those who don’t have a computer
Compact HiFi Headphone Amplifier
Complete Kit
SC6885: $70
December 2024
& January 2025
siliconchip.au/Series/432
This kit includes everything required to build the Compact HiFi Headphone Amplifier. The case is
included, but you will need your own power supply.
36
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
to zero at some time (Zt) before the end
of the switching period, as shown on
the right. This is known as discontinuous current operation.
When the inductor current falls to
zero, the inductor voltage must also
be zero, so the point vx will be at the
output voltage, Vload.
It’s pretty easy to see that the modulator transfer function will not be the
same as for the continuous conduction
case. The fact that the transfer function changes in discontinuous mode
has implications for our control loop.
You can design an optimised control loop for a switching converter
operating in either mode, but compromises are required if the converter will
operate in both modes. Converters are
therefore generally designed to work
in one mode or the other. High-power
converters usually use continuous current mode, and thus have a specified
minimum output current.
Low power converters (say, ≤50W)
often operate exclusively in discontinuous current mode. Of course, depending on what you are powering, it may
be necessary to operate in both modes,
in which case compromises much be
made to ensure stability while keeping reasonably good load and line
regulation.
Conclusion
Whew! This has been a pretty heavy
article, but I think it is important to
have a basic understanding of the principles of control theory as applied to
DC-DC converters.
You may never have to completely
design a compensator from scratch,
as the manufacturers do a lot of the
heavy lifting for us, but it is important to understand what’s going on for
those occasions when things don’t go
to plan.
At the very least, we have added
yet another tool to our growing set of
ways to look at and understand power
electronics systems.
As the number of models at our disposal grows, I am reminded of the saying, “all models are wrong, but some
models are useful”. Knowing just
which model or tool to use in what circumstance is the mark of a true expert,
and comes only with experience.
Next time, we will look at isolated DC-DC converters and reverse-
engineer a commercial converter to
see what we can learn from the proSC
fessionals.
siliconchip.com.au
Gifts + !
s
t
e
g
d
ga
altronics.com.au
NEW!
NEW!
C 9022B
SAVE $30
INTRO
SPECIAL!
129
89
$
$
T 2685
99
$
T 1348
Includes
multimeter
probes
USB Soldering Iron
With Mini Multimeter
NEW FutureTour X ANC
Headphones
The latest design from HiFuture Featuring
hybrid active noise cancellation (ANC) that
dynamically silences ambient noise. Premium
build and feel with playback time up to a
whopping 35 hours!
Instant
Xmas
lighting!
SAVE 27%
55
$
X 3227*
5m Wi-Fi RGB Strip Lighting Kit
Compact, metal-cased, heats up fast, runs on
a rechargeable battery or power bank, and
features a clear OLED display for easy use.
Plus in-built multimeter for simple continuity,
resistance and voltage testing.
C 8825
199
$
NEW!
Simple TV Remote
19.95
A simple universal IR learning remote for TV’s,
fans and more! Requires 2xAAA batteries.
X 0217
NEW!
29.95
$
360° adjustable stand
with hanging hook.
100W USB
PD Charger
Hub
$
The fan delivers a powerful blast of wind thanks to a powerful
brushless DC motor fan. Just like high power compressed air
dusters used for cleaning dust from electronics, crumbs from
keyboards and more. Includes vacuum attachment.
This lightweight and
easy to carry 3-in-1
portable fan provides a
cool breeze anywhere
you need it. Equipped
with an adjustable
brightness LED lamp,
and USB power bank
output and hanging
hook. Runs for up to
20 hours on low mode!
Offers UHF wireless mics,
Bluetooth, HDMI/optical/3.5
mm connections, adjustable
DSP (reverb, echo, bass, treble),
and supports two wired mics
— perfect for parties and home
entertainment.
Create colourful lighting effects. Controller
features a music sensor input allowing the
lighting to trigger to music. Works with Alexa
and Google Assistant.
A 1009A
Blast away dirt and dust from nooks and
crannies making cleaning a breeze!
Cool Air, Anywhere!
Dual Wireless
Karaoke Mixer
SAVE $30
Small but MIGHTY
turbo jet fan.
Great travel
accessory!
This handy hub
turns a single
USB type C PD
port into 5 x 20W
charging ports!
3 in 1 Camping
.95 & String Lights
NEW!
29
$
SAVE $9.95
M 8865
50
$
It’s a lamp, its a torch, it’s
10m of string lights! This
compact multi-use gadget
is great for camping, or just
adding instant atmosphere for
parties and more.
X 3265 Warm White
X 3266 RGB
Your electronics supplier since 1976.
Shop in-store at one of our 11 locations around Australia:
WA » PERTH » JOONDALUP » CANNINGTON » MIDLAND » MYAREE » BALCATTA
VIC » SPRINGVALE » AIRPORT WEST QLD » VIRGINIA NSW » AUBURN SA » PROSPECT
Sale ends December 31st 2025.
Build It Yourself Electronics Centre®
Gifts for kids!
X 3090
SAVE 21%
50
$
Add a micro:bit
for $41.95.
(Z6439B)
K 1148
K 1150
19.95
$
or 2 for $30
The Amazing Hover Ball!
Hugely popular when we first sold these in 2019, they
scoot across hard floors for your very own family
world cup! Requires 4xAA batteries. Ages 4+
Tobbie II the Micro:Bit Robot
Provides unlimited scope for self-programming with the
required BBC micro:bit (not included). Great tool for
teaching coding to young students. Ages 8+
SAVE $20
79
$
K 8671
39
$
Original Tobbie Kit
Tobbie is an intelligent six legged robot which
provides great interaction with children. He has two
modes to either follow or avoid objects. Ages 8+
Makerzoid®
Superbot Set
Makerzoid®
Smart Robot Set
This 300pc set contains
the parts for 72 different
project designs which can be
built using Makerzoids 3D
app tutorials. It includes an
intelligent motor controller
which can be programmed
with Scratch, plus distance
and light sensors. Includes 4
wheels for mobile projects.
Blocks are compatible with
other major brands. Includes
storage box.
SAVE 29%
This 400pc set allows kids
to build up to 26 different
projects, and create designs
of their own. Includes control
unit and intelligent sensors
(2) that allow building of line
tracking, obstacle avoiding
and following robot designs.
Includes 4 wheels for mobile
projects. Blocks are compatible
with other major brands. Fully
programmable using Scratch.
Includes storage box.
SAVE $30
109
$
K 8670
Intro to
STEM!
K 2200
K 2216
SAVE 22%
SAVE 28%
30
20
$
10 In 1 Electronics Lab Kit
Basic principles are covered and assembly is completely
solder-less using a series of spring loaded terminals to
create a circuit.
$
The Original Crystal Radio Kit
See how the crystal diode converts RF to audio and
explore the world of AM radio. Tunes into your
favourite AM radio stations.
SAVE $111
K 2222
209
$
300 In 1 Electronics Lab Kit
Learn about electronic parts, how to read schematics,
and wiring diagrams. All this, while building up to 300
different projects.
Now available in retail and bulk packs.
Don’t get caught out Christmas day!
SCAN TO FOLLOW US!
Stay up to date on latest releases,
exclusive specials and news on
our socials.
38
Silicon Chip
Like our service?
Review your store on Google.
Every review helps us serve you better.
Tech gifts
and more...
The ultimate lamp
for your electronics
work bench.
SAVE $40
Easy to set up
anywhere!
This month
149
X 4200 3 Dioptre
X 4201 5 Dioptre
$
A 3615
109
$
SAVE
$20
No more eye strain!
Mini Wi-Fi LED Projector
Great for movie nights with friends and family!
This compact projector offers excellent LED picture quality with 800x480p resolution for screens
up to 4m (170”) wide! Very simple to set up with adjustable focus & projection distance (1-5m).
HDMI input or Wi-Fi screen mirroring for playback directly from your device.
NEW!
129
Ultra-bright long life LED for fantastic clarity.
Why pay $400 or more for a Maggy-Lamp?
Let “gadget” be your eyes. Identify those
impossible to read miniature parts without
straining your eyes. Great for collectors, model
makers, jewellers etc.
Get a crisp
close up view
X 7019*
$
Q 1278B
Adjustable 5x-7x
magnifier with LED
backlight. Great for
reading fine print,
maps, examining
parts and more!
SAVE 23%
25
$
Must
have for
the Xmas
roast!
With USB
charging.
X 0432B
SAVE 15%
42
$
Measure temps instantly!
Two Roasts, One App.
Monitor your roast or BBQ with ease using this
smart Bluetooth meat thermometer—track
temps, set targets, and get real-time updates
right from your phone. Easy USB recharging.
Includes battery.
Portable
design with
recording to
SD card
A handy fast reading digital thermometer
suitable for a wide array of uses such as
monitoring liquids or BBQ use - great for
roasting meats; home brew setups and more!
-50°C to +300°C . Includes 3V button battery.
NEW!
49.95
$
X 0436
SAVE 24%
A 0329
30
$
Battery Free Door Bell
Never change batteries again! Kinetic action
with wireless chime unit. 58 ring tones.
150m range.
10x Mini LED UV Magnifier
Ultra compact magnifier loupe for close up
inspection. Offers standard and UV modes, plus
easy USB C recharging.
Get 20x closer for
ultra-fine inspection
X 0437
135
$
Zoom into flawless clarity instantly! This compact inspection
camera offers 8x, 12x, 15x, 20x magnification and support PC
connection for large screen display. Lightweight, versatile, and
ideal for precision tasks, it delivers powerful visual enhancement
wherever you need it.
NO STRESS 30 DAY RETURNS!
GOT A QUESTION?
Not satisfied or not suitable? No worries! Return it in
original condition within 30 days and get a refund.
Ask us! Email us any time at:
customerservice<at>altronics.com.au
Conditions apply - see website.
NEW!
Gifts for
explorers!
Great gift idea
g
for any youn
driver!
M 8195C
Mini Flexible
Bluetooth Tripod
SAVE
50%!
SAVE $10
X 0229
9
$ .95
Pop Up 3W Torch/Lantern
Essential addition to any camping trip. Pop
up to turn into a lantern. Magnetic base.
Requires 3xAA batteries.
SAVE $50
Lithium-Ion Vehicle Jump
Starter & Power Bank
Record videos anywhere
with this handy flexible
tripod for phones, GoPro
cameras and small /
mirrorless cameras.
279
$
Don’t get stuck with a dud battery!
Suits 12V battery vehicles. 24000mAh rated battery provides up to
2400A peak output when cranking. A 90W USB PD output is provided
for your laptop (use it like a giant battery bank!). It also has a 600
lumen LED torch in built.
SAVE 28%
25
$
D 2212*
C 5162
SAVE $30
99
$
X 0212A
SAVE 20%
29
SAVE $59
229
$
Gear up for
n,
festive seaso
0
0
3
$
ay
p
y
wh
or more?
$
Aluminium USB Torch
Durable all metal 5 Watt USB rechargeable
torch. Can be used as an emergency power
battery bank. 182mm long.
M 8867
C 5161
SAVE $40
140W USB PD Car Charger
149
Charge up all your devices from your vehicle!
Provides 140W USB C Power Delivery
(PD3.0/3.1). Fitted with convenient 2m cable.
SAVE 15%
25
$
X 0204
X 0604C
Boom Box & Wireless PA Systems
SAVE 17%
Need instant sound for your festive get together?
33
$
Genlamp® Pro Head Torch
Feature packed 280 lumen spot + 220 lumen
flood beam, plus rear red/white visibility
light. USB C recharging.
SAVE 24%
X 0203
15
$
USB Dual LED Head Torch
Weather resistant, USB rechargeable, & 120
lumens for JUST $15! Why pay $50 or more?
Plus it separates and turns into a
freestanding magnetic lantern.
$
Bluetooth Car Audio Adapter
Works as a hands free system for calls plus plays
audio from your phone. USB C 20W PD & QC3.0
chargers in-built.
Pick up a new Bluetooth entertainer box - available in small or large
systems. They not only sound great, but offer a wireless micro phone
for PA use, plus TWS pairing to a second unit (of the same type)
for added volume. Offers up to 3-8 hours use from a single charge
(depending on volume).
AMAZING
VALUE!
Mini BT Speaker
& Wireless Charger
A MagSafe compatible
charging pad plus a
Bluetooth speaker
with LED lighting.
SAVE 14%
D 2035*
30
$
SAVE $54
175
$
Solar DC-DC Battery Charger
N 2087 20A
This dual input design connects to a solar panel and your cars
alternator (12 or 24V) to provide charging for secondary batteries such
as those used in campers, caravans and trades service vans/trailers.
Suitable for Lead Acid, AGM and Lithium Fe PO4 batteries.
Sale Ends December 31st 2025
Shop in-store at one of our 11 locations around Australia:
WA » PERTH » JOONDALUP » CANNINGTON » MIDLAND » MYAREE » BALCATTA
VIC » SPRINGVALE » AIRPORT WEST QLD » VIRGINIA NSW » AUBURN SA » PROSPECT
Or find a local reseller at: altronics.com.au/storelocations/dealers/
Shop online 24/7 <at> altronics.com.au
© Altronics 2025. E&OE. Prices stated here in are only valid until date shown or until stocks run out. Prices include GST and exclude freight and insurance. See latest catalogue for freight rates.
B 0012
Nicholas Vinen
Adjustable brightness and ambient auto-dimming using an LDR
Adjustable pattern cycle time
Mostly pre-assembled; can be up and running in under an
hour
Power supply: 12V DC recommended <at> 1-2A (operating
range: 6-16V DC)
SC7535 Kit ($80)
Includes a pre-assembled PCB with
nearly all parts fitted, except for IC1,
REG2 etc (see the parts list)
24cm tall and wide white star-shaped PCB
80 onboard bright WS2812B RGB LEDs in a star/circle pattern
12 different LED light patterns, each with four possible colour
palettes
Manual or auto-cycling patterns and palettes
Jazz up your Christmas tree (or just about anything else) with this luminous RGB LED
Star. It has 80 “NeoPixel” LEDs that create an array of dazzling, colourful patterns.
You can choose which patterns and colour schemes you like, adjust the brightness and
more. It’s quick and easy to build, too!
siliconchip.com.au
Australia's electronics magazine
December 2025 41
Y
ou can watch a video of some
of the available patterns and
colour schemes at siliconchip.
au/Video/RGBStar
It has been a few years since we’ve published a Christmas ornament project,
despite those generally being very popular. Partly it’s because people were
still building our previous designs.
However, while making more kits
for the November 2020 RGB LED
Christmas Star, we had two realisations. Firstly, it had been five years
since we published that design. Secondly, it’s a lot of work to build, but
people obviously think it’s worthwhile
as they continue to order kits for it.
It uses 30 individual RGB LEDs,
with four pins to solder on each, plus
90 current-limiting resistors, 13 driver
ICs, more than 20 bypass capacitors
and some other sundry parts. Assembling the board would take most of a
day. That got us thinking: was there
an easier way?
Our first thought was WS2812B
“NeoPixel” LEDs. These devices have
GND and Vcc pins plus serial data
input and output pins (four in total).
The Vcc and GND pins are all joined in
parallel, while the output of one LED
goes to the input of another, forming a
daisy chain (you may well have seen
these on RGB LED strips).
That means you only need one pin
on a microcontroller to drive many
– possibly even hundreds – of these
devices. They’re bright and can display one of 16,777,215 different
colours. By writing clever software on
a microcontroller, we could generate
all sorts of cool patterns using a string
of these devices. So what’s not to like?
Our concerns were that they are
SMD-only and, if you buy them individually and put a lot on a board, the
cost can add up. However, there is a
solution to that: get the PCB manufacturer to solder the LEDs for you.
That saves a lot of work and gives a
neat, professional result. Also, because
they have access to huge quantities
directly from the manufacturer, it
can be cheaper than buying individual parts and soldering them yourself.
Down the rabbit hole
So we set to work designing a PCB
for this, with four questions immediately popping up. What shape, size
and colour should the board be, and
how many NeoPixel LEDs should we
put on it?
We liked the star concept, but
weren’t sold on the five-pointed star
used in the November 2020 project we
mentioned earlier. Partly that was out
of a desire to do something different,
but also, five-pointed stars don’t look
right to us.
Of course, real stars don’t have
points; they are distant, bright spheres
that should look like a point source.
It’s the optical imaging system (a telescope, or perhaps our eyes) that makes
them appear to have points. Usually,
those points are arranged symmetrically, meaning there are an even number of them.
Fig.1 shows an image from the James
Webb Space Telescope where you can
see that its optics generate six lines
that appear to emerge from the star’s
point source. To cut a long story short,
we decided that a more realistic and
cool-looking star would have four long
and four short points, with the short
points offset by 45°.
We also decided to make the board
white, for two reasons. Firstly, to differentiate it from the earlier star, which
was black, and secondly, because the
original WS2812B LEDs came in white
plastic packages. (Black ones are now
available, but let’s put them aside for
another day.)
As for the size, we were able to
design a board with that shape that
wouldn’t be too expensive to manufacture by making it 238mm tall and
238mm wide. The trick is to rotate the
design by 45° so that it fits inside a 168
× 168mm square, as that’s the basis
on which the manufacturers charge
(238mm ÷ 168mm ≈ √2).
Having drawn the board shape, we
arranged a string of LEDs around the
edge of the star shape, plus two rings
inside, ending up with 80 LEDs in
total. That seemed like a reasonable
number to generate some interesting
patterns. So the mechanical side of
things was sorted out, and it was time
to turn to the electronics!
Power delivery and control
Fig.1: stars look like more than just points because of the optics viewing them
(eg, a telescope or our eyes). The lines that appear to radiate from them are
normally symmetrical, meaning an even number, and some are longer than
others. Hence the shape of our Star, with four long points and four short ones.
At full brightness, set to produce
white light, each LED draws around
50mA. Multiply that by the 80 LEDs
and we can see that we need to deliver
around 4A at 5V to run them all. That’s
a substantial amount of power: 20W.
Of course, this isn’t a torch, so we
would never actually drive them all
white at once. The actual average
power required would be a more modest 10W or so; 2A at 5V. And that’s
assuming you would run it at full
brightness, which, to get a bit technical, is eye-searingly bright. Most people would run it close to 5W of total
LED power.
Still, the 10W figure could be delivered by a reasonably efficient 2A buck
(step-down) regulator running from a
higher voltage, like 12V. The same 5V
supply (or a separate one) could then
run a microcontroller to generate the
patterns.
Besides the LEDs, the micro and
power supply, we would also need
a decent number of bypass capacitors spread around the board. The
WS2812B LEDs control brightness
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
42
Silicon Chip
using pulse-width modulation (PWM),
meaning there will be constant switching spikes distributed around the
board. So we’ll want a few ceramic and
perhaps tantalum polymer capacitors
to keep the 5V rail nice and stable.
All that would be left would be a
few buttons and perhaps trimpots
to do things like adjust brightness,
change the patterns, set up pattern
auto-cycling and such. Add an LDR
to monitor the ambient light level for
auto-dimming, and the design was
complete.
Getting it assembled
As mentioned earlier, our plan was
to order some prototype PCBs and have
the manufacturer fit the WS2812B
LEDs for us. We would then add the
power supply, microcontroller and a
few other bits and pieces to finish it off.
The power supply and microcontroller could go on the back of the board,
so they wouldn’t mar its appearance,
meaning only one side of the board
needed to be pre-populated.
We figured we could also get them
to place the bypass capacitors for the
WS2812Bs on the same side, as they
would not ruin the appearance as long
as we placed them symmetrically. But
we’d leave fitting all the other parts
for ourselves (or someone else building this later). As we went through
this process, we discovered that the
WS2812B LEDs require “special
handling” because they have a high
moisture-sensitivity level (MSL5).
Automated/contract PCB assembly
is usually done using solder reflow,
where solder paste is melted in an
infrared (IR) oven, or wave soldering,
where a wave of molten solder passes
over the surface of the board and some
sticks to the exposed pads and pins.
In both cases, the components rapidly heat up from room temperature to
about 250°C over a few minutes. They
sit at the high temperature for just long
enough to let all the solder melt and
reflow, then they are cooled back down
to close to ambient temperature. The
whole process takes about 4-6 minutes.
If any components on the board contain moisture (water), that water will
flash boil and rapidly expand. The
result can be exploding components
– not what you want. So they have to
be dry before you start; either removed
from a hermetically sealed package
just before soldering, or baked in an
oven at a lower temperature (90-125°C
siliconchip.com.au
Parts List – RGB LED Star Ornament
1 white 168 × 168mm double-sided star-shaped PCB coded 16112251
1 12V DC 1A+ (2A recommended) power supply ×
1 2-pin header or right-angle header (CON1; optional) •
1 5-pin header or right-angle header (CON2; optional, for ICSP) ×
1 3-pin header or right-angle header (CON3; optional, for testing) ×
2 6A 18mW (120W <at> 100MHz) SMD M3216/1206 ferrite beads (FB1, FB2)
[Tai-Tech HCB3216KF-121T60]
1 2.7A 33μH shielded SMD inductor, 12 × 12mm (L1)
[Sunltech SLH1204S330MTT]
1 GL5528 20kW-1MW LDR (LDR1) •
3 6 × 3mm two-pin SMD tactile pushbutton switches with white actuators
(S1-S3)
2 10kW Bourns TC33X-2-103E SMD trimpots (VR1, VR2)
Semiconductors
1 PIC16F18126-I/SL 8-bit 14-pin microcontroller programmed with
1611225A.HEX, SOIC-14 (IC1) •
1 LDL1117S50R or AMS1117-5 low-dropout 5V linear regulator, SOT-223
(REG1)
1 AP5002 20V 2A 500kHz integrated buck regulator, SOIC-8 (REG2) •
80 WS2812B-V5 serial RGB “NeoPixel” LEDs, SMD 5050 (LED1-LED80)
1 AO3400A 30V 5.8A N-channel Mosfet, SOT-23 (Q1)
1 BZX84C5V6 5.6V ±1% 250mW SMD zener diode, SOT-23 (ZD1)
1 BZG05C-5V6 5.6V ±6% 1.25W SMD zener diode, DO-214AC (ZD2)
1 B340A or S3A 40V 3A SMD schottky diode, DO-214AC (D1)
Capacitors (all 50V SMD X7R MLCC, M3216/1206 size unless noted)
1 220μF 25V polymer aluminium electrolytic capacitor, 6.3×6mm SMD
[Shengyang SM227M025E0600]
6 220μF 6.3V polymer tantalum electrolytic capacitors, SMB case
[Panasonic 6TPE220MAZB]
12 22μF 25V X5R
1 22μF 10V SMA tantalum [Kyocera AVX TAJA226M010RNJ]
31 100nF
1 4.7nF
1 1nF
Resistors (all ±1% SMD M3216/1206 size)
2 100kW
1 10kW
2 6.8kW
1 1.3kW
1 1kW
1 330W
RGB LED Star Kit (SC7535, $80 + P&P): comes with a pre-assembled PCB
with all parts fitted except those marked with • or ×. The parts marked • are
included in the kit but must be fitted by the constructor.
for 24-48 hours) to drive out all the
moisture before soldering.
So, we had to pay a little extra to
get the WS2812B LEDs for our prototype boards baked. That meant we
needed to choose the ‘standard’ assembly service rather than the ‘economic’
one. The standard service also allows
you to put components on both sides
of the board. Hmm. It was starting to
look like we might as well get virtually
the whole thing assembled!
One of the parts we chose to use, the
buck regulator controller, is no longer
being manufactured (we’ll explain
why we chose it a bit later). We have
hundreds, but didn’t feel like sending them to the manufacturer, so we
decided to solder it ourselves. It’s only
an 8-pin device in a relatively large
Australia's electronics magazine
SOIC package, so not difficult for us
or any other constructor to add.
We also left the PIC16 chip that
produces the patterns off the assembled board. It’s also in an SOIC package (with 14 pins, though) and we figured we could supply programmed
chips that constructors could easily
fit to the board. We also didn’t have
them put any headers on it, since we
figured people might have different
preferred arrangements for wiring up
the power supply.
Other than that, though, all our prototype boards – and the ones we’ll supply to readers – come with almost all
the parts fitted. So assembly is quick
and easy, despite the large number
of LEDs! This also helps to keep the
total cost to build it down, since the
December 2025 43
manufacturer can source these parts
in bulk from their partner warehouse.
As a result, we can supply a kit that
includes the mostly assembled board,
programmed microcontroller and
switch-mode chip, ready to assemble,
for around $80 + P&P.
That is somewhat more than the $45
we charge for the November 2020 RGB
LED Star kit, but considering the time
savings in not having to assemble the
whole thing yourself from well over
one hundred parts, the larger PCB,
larger number of LEDs, better patterns and brightness, it ends up being
a pretty good deal.
But for those intrepid constructors,
the blank PCB will be available separately, if you want to assemble the
whole project yourself.
Circuit details
The full circuit of the RGB LED Star
is shown in Fig.2. By showing only
some of the long chain of LEDs, we
manage to keep it relatively simple. It
can be broken into three main blocks:
the LEDs, the microcontroller and the
power supply.
Microcontroller IC1 drives
the chain of LEDs (LED1LED80) via its RA2 digital
output and a 330W series
resistor, as recommended
in WS2812B data sheets to
reduce overshoot and ringing from trace inductance
and limit fault current
into the first LED.
Each LED’s output
drives the subsequent
LED input until LED80,
which is loaded with a resistor to
ground to reduce the chance of any
ringing or EMI from an unterminated
output pin.
A total of 42 bypass capacitors scattered around the board, in three different values, provide local bypassing for these 80 LEDs. In total, they
can draw up to 4A (!), and they dim
the LEDs using PWM, so we want to
ensure they see a low 5V supply source
impedance.
Test header CON3 gives us a way
to drive the LEDs before IC1 is soldered to the board, should we need
that. Most constructors will not need
to fit it.
The user controls are three pushbuttons, S1-S3, and two trimpots, VR1
& VR2; the buttons connect to digital
inputs RC0-RC2 (pins 10-8). The software in IC1 enables a weak pull-up
current on these pins so they are normally held high, at around 5V. When
a button is pressed, it pulls that pin
to 0V, transitioning to a digital low, so
the software can sense that. Debouncing is performed in software.
When VR1 & VR2 are rotated, they
vary the voltages at pins 3 & 2 of IC1
between 0V (fully anti-clockwise) and
5V (fully clockwise). IC1 uses its internal analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
to convert these voltages into numbers
between 0 and 4095, to control the
overall brightness and the duration of
each different pattern, respectively.
Another analog input, ANC5 at
pin 5, connects to the junction of a
light-dependent
resistor (LDR1)
and a fixed
100kW resistor.
The voltage at this
pin will be higher
The front of the LED Star
includes two buttons to
change patterns.
44
Silicon Chip
in bright ambient lighting conditions
and closer to 0V in darkness. Again,
the ADC is used to sample this voltage
to provide auto-dimming, so the LEDs
are not so bright at night, but bright
enough to see clearly during the day.
At 100% brightness, the RGB LED
star is eye-searing! So we definitely
need both manual and automatic
brightness control.
Five-pin header CON2 can be used
to program IC1 in-circuit. We used
this during development, but since
kits/boards will come with a pre-
programmed microcontroller, you
won’t need to fit it unless you want
to design your own patterns or otherwise make changes to the firmware.
Power supply
Power comes in via a two-pin header
(CON1) or soldered wires shown at
upper left. Mosfet Q1 and zener diode
ZD1 provide reverse polarity protection without dropping much voltage.
If the polarity is correct, Q1’s gate is
pulled high, switching it on and providing a low-resistance path between
the negative conductor and ground.
If the polarity is reversed, Q1’s gate
is pulled negative. It remains off, and
its intrinsic body diode is reverse-
biased, so no current can flow. The
Mosfet is rated at 30V, and ZD1 clamps
its gate voltage at a safe level, so nothing will happen with a negative voltage up to -30V applied to the circuit.
The maximum positive voltage is limited to 18V by REG1.
One 220μF aluminium polymer
electrolytic capacitor and two 22μF
ceramics provide bulk storage and
bypassing for the input of REG1, an
LDL1117 5V low-dropout regulator.
This is a true low-dropout regulator,
and it will provide a regulated 5V
rail for the microcontroller
as long as there’s at least
5.5V at its input. It also has
a 22μF tantalum output filter
capacitor, required for stability.
Its 5V output is only used to power
the microcontroller and connected
components like the LDR and trimpots. This means that the switching noise from the LEDs doing their
PWM brightness control won’t affect
the microcontroller’s analog measurements.
The remainder of the power supply
is a DC/DC converter that supplies the
high-current 5V rail for the LEDs. It is
based around REG2, an AP5002 ‘2A
siliconchip.com.au
Fig.2: the PIC16F18126 microcontroller at lower left controls the 80 LEDs by sending serial data from its RA2 digital
output. The LEDs have plenty of bypass capacitors of various sizes to provide them with the peak current they draw
during operation. The power supply at the top includes reverse-polarity protection (Q1/ZD1), a linear regulator to power
the micro (REG1) and a switch-mode step-down buck regulator (REG2) to power the LEDs from a ~12V DC source.
buck’ converter. This chip is obsolete
now, but we like it so much that we
bought several hundred, so we will
supply them with boards/kits (or separately, if you really need one for some
other reason).
Some of the reasons we are still
using this is that it is easy to solder,
coming in an 8-pin SOIC package with
no thermal pad underneath; it has a
useful range of voltages (up to 20V)
and currents (it says 2A but can actually deliver 4A or more in some cases),
can go to 100% duty cycle (meaning
it’s a ‘low dropout’ buck regulator!)
siliconchip.com.au
and it’s up to 90% efficient. We also
find that it ‘just works’.
One of its nice features is an external
compensation network that requires
just two or three components. This
is one of the keys to its stability in a
wide range of situations. We’ve used
it in a few projects before, such as the
Simple 1.2-20V 1.5A Switching Regulator (February 2012; siliconchip.au/
Article/774) and the CLASSiC DAC
(February-April 2013; siliconchip.au/
Series/63).
Now, while in theory the LEDs could
draw up to about 4A if they were all
Australia's electronics magazine
at 100% brightness and set to white;
this is not a torch, so that’s unlikely to
happen. In general, this regulator will
see a load below 2A <at> 5V; perhaps a
little higher in extreme cases. So, the
internal switch current limit of 3.5A
and L1’s rating of 2.7A are not really
of concern (especially since L1’s current rating is saturation-based, not
thermal).
Since we’re recommending a 12V
DC input and we’re producing a regulated 5V (more like 4.9V, actually) for
the LEDs, REG2 is operating near its
sweet spot, around 90% efficiency (its
December 2025 45
Fig.3: the star has been
rotated 45° to fit on the
page; the upper-left corner is
intended to be the top. All
the components you see here come
pre-soldered to the board except for
LDR1, in the centre. Some holes at lower- right allow you to attach it to a stick or the
top of a Christmas tree.
2A headline rating is more of a ‘worstcase scenario’, thankfully).
We have ferrite beads at the input
and output of the DC/DC converter
section to try to reduce the amount of
switching hash radiated from either
end. FB2 is also convenient in that if
you run into problems, you can remove
it to disconnect the output of the DC/
DC converter from the LEDs, allowing
you to test them in isolation.
Zener diode ZD2 is not strictly necessary; it’s a ‘belts and braces’ protection measure. Should there be positive spikes from the output of REG2
for some reason (eg, the load suddenly goes from 4A to 50mA and it
can’t switch off fast enough), ZD2 will
46
Silicon Chip
conduct once the LED supply exceeds
about 5.5V, limiting the supply rail to a
safe level of about 6V in the short term.
PCB design
The top side of the assembled board
is shown in Fig.3. The only part you
need is add here is the LDR at the centre. The first LED in the chain, LED1,
is towards upper left. You can follow the snaking path of the data from
there clockwise around the star, back
to LED56 just below LED1, then to the
circle formed by LED57-LED72, and
finally the smaller concentric circle
formed by LED73-LED80.
Note how there is a polymer tantalum capacitor on each of the longer
Australia's electronics magazine
‘arms’ of the star, plus two in the middle, for distributed bypassing. The
eight points of the star also feature a
22μF bypass capacitor, plus numerous
100nF capacitors scattered throughout so that all LEDs have a low source
impedance.
Most of the copper on the top of
the board is a +5V distribution plane,
with the underside copper being GND.
Hence, there are pairs of vias near the
GND end of most components to connect them to the ground plane.
The star is intended to be rotated so
that LED5 is at the top. There are holes
at each long point (eg, for hanging it),
plus some extra holes on the bottom
one so that a stick or similar can be
siliconchip.com.au
Fig.4: the control and power
supply circuitry is located
in the centre of the back of the
Star. The DC/DC converter
delivers 4.9V DC at up to several amps
to the centre of the board, where it’s
conducted out to the LEDs arrayed around it by copper planes; the front of the board
has the +5V (4.9V) plane while the GND plane is on the back side.
attached for holding it up (shown with
M2 machine screws in them in some
of the photos).
Turning to the underside (Fig.4),
you can see that the power supply
and control components are clustered in the centre, divided by fivepin header CON2. The control components are above and to the right
of CON2, while the power supply is
below and left. The power connections
(CON1) are near the bottom of the star,
so any attached wires can hang down
behind it.
A slight revision
We made just a couple of minor
changes to the design between the
siliconchip.com.au
prototype and the final version. Firstly,
we added a 220μF 25V low-ESR aluminium polymer capacitor across the
input of the linear regulator, REG1,
visible on the left in Fig.4. This is to
overcome any lead inductance from
the power supply, suppress ringing
and provide a local charge reservoir
for the switch-mode regulator.
While the prototype worked without
it, we felt that it was worthwhile adding, especially since the part only costs
about 10¢. We also added another 22μF
ceramic capacitor in parallel with it
for higher-frequency stabilisation of
the input supply.
Finally, we decided to replace
the boring old AMS1117-5 regulator
Australia's electronics magazine
(REG1) on the prototype with the more
modern LDL1117S50R.
This is a direct drop-in replacement,
as it’s in the same SOT-223 package
and has the same pinout. However, it
is a true low-dropout regulator that can
withstand a higher input voltage (18V
vs 15V), with a lower quiescent current
(0.25mA vs 5mA), so we thought it was
a worthwhile upgrade (the required
tantalum output capacitor upgrade
costs more than the regulator).
Construction
When you receive the board, it
should have all the top-side components fitted besides LDR1, and all the
underside components fitted besides
December 2025 47
the three pin headers (all of which are
optional), IC1 and REG2.
It will also have a pair of ‘rails’
attached to it, which were used to
hold it during the assembly process
(see the photo below). There is a series
of holes drilled between the rails and
the PCB edges (‘mouse bites’). These
allow you to easily snap the rail off
by flexing the junction back and forth
a few times.
The breaks should be fairly clean,
but if you want to, you can clean them
up with a file. Just make sure you don’t
breathe the resulting fibreglass dust
(eg, do it outdoors and ideally while
wearing a mask, or at least with the
wind blowing it away from you).
Testing
Our prototypes worked straight
away, so really the easiest way to
proceed is to solder LDR1, IC1 and
REG2 to the board, making sure IC1
& REG2 are orientated correctly, then
apply power and check that it lights
up and start producing some nice LED
patterns. However, if you want to test
it more methodically, you can (as we
did with our prototypes initially, just
to be safe).
Firstly, you can solder CON3 to the
board. If you don’t want it visible on
the front of the Star, you can either
solder wires to the pads on the rear,
or remove it later.
Connect CON3’s terminal
marked + to the output of a
bench supply. Short the
The LED Star has some M2-sized
mounting holes, for if you want to
attach it to something solid.
other two pins together and connect
them to the negative output/ground.
Set the current limit to 100mA, the
voltage to 5V and apply power. Our
board drew 40mA in this condition,
exactly what was expected when powering 80 LEDs with 0.5mA quiescent
current each.
This verifies that there are no short
circuits or faulty components among
the LEDs or their bypass capacitors.
Next, solder to the pads of CON1.
You can use a right-angle header on
the rear of the board if you have the
type of right-angle header you
can solder from the same
side, such as a polarised right-angle
header. Alternatively, solder the wires
to the board.
Apply 7-12V DC and you should
see a current draw of around 5mA
if you have an early board with the
AMS1117, or 0.5mA if you have the
LDL1117 regulator. Use a multimeter
to check the voltage between pads 1
& 14 of IC1. You should get a reading
close to 5V.
Now remove power and solder
REG2 to the board (remember what
we said earlier about getting its orientation right!). One side is quite close
to D1, but we managed to solder the
pins on that side without bridges
by bringing the iron in from above.
Good news: pins 5 & 6 are connected
electrically, as are pins 7 & 8, so as
long as you don’t get a bridge across
the middle two pins on that side,
it’ll be fine!
Place a jumper on CON3 between
the middle and ground pins (ie, not
on the + side). This holds the input
to LED1 low. Now apply 6-12V via
CON1 and measure the voltage across
the pins on either side of CON3, being
careful not to short anything. You
should measure close to 4.9V DC, and
the current draw should be around
50mA.
If all is good, switch it off and solder IC1 to its pads, again checking its
orientation carefully. This should be
easy as there aren’t any components
too close to its pins, but check for
solder bridges and if you find any,
remove them with flux paste and solder wick.
Because parts are soldered to both sides of
the PCB, it needs to be manufactured with
rails, as shown here. They are used to hold
it in place during soldering. When you receive it, you can flex them back
and forth a few times carefully and they will snap off. If you want to clean up
the rough edges left behind, it’s easy to do with a file, but don’t breathe the dust.
48
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
The finished underside of the RGB LED star is shown on the right,
with a close-up shown inset. This inset photo shows the missing parts
that you need to fit yourself, but are included in the kit.
If IC1 hasn’t been programmed,
you can attach CON2 and a PIC programmer and upload the firmware
(1611225A.HEX). But since you most
likely bought an assembled board, it
will come with a pre-programmed
chip, so you are ready to power it up
properly using a high-current (capable of at least 1A) 12V DC supply at
CON1 and you should be rewarded
with colourful patterns.
Using it
By default, it will cycle through all
12 possible patterns and four colour
palettes at an interval determined
by the setting of trimpot VR2. Fully
anti-clockwise will make it cycle
roughly once per second, while fully
clockwise will give you around five
minutes per pattern. VR1 will adjust
the overall brightness, and the light
level on LDR1 will also affect the
brightness.
You’ll need a jeweller’s slotted
screwdriver or a similarly slim tool to
rotate the small screws of the two trimpots. Note that there are no stops; they
rotate through 360° but they only work
properly over about ¾ of that travel.
So if you get flickering when adjusting
VR1, or odd behaviour when adjusting VR2, you’re probably off the track.
Pressing S1 briefly will switch
to manual pattern selection mode.
Each further press of S1 will cycle to
the next pattern. Once pattern 12 is
reached, pressing S1 will go back to
pattern 1.
siliconchip.com.au
Similarly, pressing S2
briefly will switch to manual
palette selection mode. Each
further press of S2 will cycle
to the next palette. Once the
fourth palette is reached, pressing S2 will go back to the first.
The auto-cycling works
mostly independently for patterns and palettes, meaning you
can have both change automatically periodically, or just one or the
other, or neither. To resume auto-
cycling the pattern, hold down S1 for
a couple of seconds. To resume auto-
cycling the palette, hold down S2 for
a couple of seconds.
If both are set to cycle, when it’s
time to cycle, the unit will select the
next enabled pattern with a random
palette. That way, you get to see different patterns with different palettes.
You can disable some patterns or
palettes if you don’t like them. To disable the current pattern (regardless
of whether it’s auto-cycling or manually selected), hold S2, then quickly
press and release S1, then release S2.
It will go to the next enabled pattern,
and the last pattern will be skipped
from now on.
You can’t re-enable individual patterns since you can’t select them, but
you can re-enable them all by holding
down S2, then pressing and holding
S1 for a few seconds, and then releasing S1 before S2.
Similarly, to disable the current
palette, hold S1, then quickly press
Australia's electronics magazine
S2, release S2 and then S1. It
will go to the next enabled palette, and the last palette will be
skipped from now on. You can’t
disable the last pattern or palette,
though. To re-enable all palettes,
hold down S1, then hold down S2
for a few seconds, then release S2,
then S1.
There is a third switch on the back
of the board labelled S3. It can be used
to change the LDR setpoints or disable
automatic brightness control. Usually,
VR1 sets the maximum brightness, but
it will be reduced if the LDR senses a
low ambient light level. By default, it
will be reduced to a very low setting,
around 5% of maximum, in complete
darkness.
To change that, adjust VR1 to get the
minimum brightness you want, then
press S3 briefly. You can disable auto
brightness adjustment by holding S3
for a couple of seconds; then only VR1
sets the brightness. Setting the minimum re-enables it.
You may want to temporarily disable auto brightness when adjusting
VR1 to set the minimum since it’ll
remove the effect of ambient light
while you are making the setting.
If you find that too much of the light
from the LEDs shines on the LDR, making its brightness control unstable or
ineffective, you could shrink a short
section of black heatshrink tubing
around it to shield it from light from
the sides. That way, it should only
react to ambient or reflected light. We
December 2025 49
didn’t need to do that, but since the
LDR calibration is automatic, it must
be exposed to both light and dark
before it will sense properly.
Firmware operation
The firmware is written in C and
split into five files:
• neopixel.c is the main program
that includes pin configuration,
peripheral configuration, button,
potentiometer and LDR sensing, user
interface logic, LED update code and
the main loop.
• LEDs.c contains 320 bytes of data,
stored in flash, on the locations of the
80 LEDs on the physical PCB for use
by the effects code.
• rgb.c contains helper functions
that generate the four colour palettes
and perform RGB colour mixing.
• trig.c contains an integer sine
table and sine/cosine functions for
trigonometric effects.
• effects.c contains the logic to
implement the 12 separate patterns
that can be displayed on the LEDs.
Some effects are based on the locations of the LEDs in the chain, some
on their Cartesian (X/Y) coordinates on
the PCB, and some on their polar (distance/angle coordinates) on the PCB.
For example, effect #1 is a gradient
that snakes its way along the chain
of LEDs from LED1 to LED80. It is a
nice-looking effect but the simplest to
implement.
Effect #3 is coloured circles that
radiate from the centre of the star,
out the points, and then end. It uses
the polar coordinates, comparing the
distance of the LED from the centre
of the board to the current radius of
the circle.
Effect #5 is a colour spectrum that
rotates around the display like a spinning wheel. It is similar to effect #1,
but it uses the polar angle of the LED
rather than its position in the chain.
Effect #10 is coloured bubbles that
grow from random points within the
star and then burst. It calculates the
distance of an LED from the centre of
a bubble using the formula distance =
√(x1 – x2)2 + (y1 – y2)2.
The effects are double buffered,
meaning that the processor is calculating the next state of the LEDs to
show (into buffer x) simultaneously
with transmitting the last update to the
LED string (from buffer y). The buffers
are swapped on each run through the
SC
main loop.
50
Silicon Chip
Updating Neopixels using the CLC hardware
We got this idea from Microchip Application Note AN1606 “Using the Configurable Logic Cell (CLC) to Interface a PIC16F1509 and WS2811 LED Driver”. Unfortunately, the CLC peripheral in modern PICs is configured quite differently from
the PIC16F1509, so the code in that App Note is no longer very useful.
Also, we realised it’s unnecessarily complex – using two CLCs when the job
can be done with just one (possibly due to improvements in the CLCs since it
was written).
The difficulty in driving WS2812B chips is that they use a somewhat unique
scheme that encodes 0s and 1s into different-length positive pulses. Interestingly, different versions of the WS2812B, even within the same manufacturer,
have different specifications for what is required. As shown in Fig.a, the specific
version we are using (V5) requires:
Zero bit: 220-380ns high, 580-1000ns low
One bit: 580-1000ns high, 580-1000ns low
Reset frame: low for at least 280μs
Note how this scheme is difficult to encode with a system that emits bits at
consistent intervals. A zero bit lasts for 800-1380ns and a one bit lasts for 11602000ns. So, to have consistent bit intervals, the interval must be between 1160ns
(862kHz) and 1380ns (725kHz).
If you select an interval in the middle of, say, 1250ns (800kHz), that means you
could have a one bit with a 50% duty cycle, ie, 625ns high and 625ns low. The
high time for the zero bit would need to be at least 250ns to avoid the low time
exceeding the 1000ns threshold, giving you a range of 250-380ns.
We use the MSSP peripheral to generate an 800kHz SPI stream as the basis
for this signal. This gives us an SCK signal that’s high for 625ns and low for
625ns, and an SDO signal that’s either high or low for 1250ns depending on the
value of the bit being transmitted.
We feed both of these to a CLC cell, along with a synchronised PWM waveform
that has a high time of around half the SCK high-time at ~312.5ns – see Fig.b.
Fig.a: there are quite a few WS2812B variants, and they all seem to have slightly
different timing requirements (sometimes compatible with each other, sometimes
not). We’re using the current V5 variant; its timing is shown at upper right here, with
the data formats (common to all variants) below. The timings in the lower part of the
diagram are nominal.
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
Fig.b: we’re using the MSSP serial
peripheral, CCP PWM generator and
CLC configurable logic cell in the
PIC to generate the WS2812B signal
with minimal CPU overhead. Writing
a byte to a buffer triggers the MSSP
to generate eight bits of data. We
combine its clock (SCK), serial data
output (SDO) and synchronised PWM
signal with the CLC to make the
orange waveform the LEDs expect.
That time of year is nearly here...
CHRISTMAS
Spice up your festive season
with eight LED decorations!
Luckily for us, it’s possible to synchronise the MSSP to a PWM peripheral by setting the SSPM bits in the
SSPxCON1 register to a value of 3 (SPI
Host Mode: Clock = TMR2 output/2).
TMR2 is also the default clock source
for a Capture/Compare/PWM (CCP)
Module, which can be set in PWM
mode. So we can synchronise the
leading edge of the PWM pulses with
the leading edge of the SCK pulses.
We can then use the CLC to perform the simple logic operation (SDO & SCK) | PWM. The SDO & SCK operation
produces 625ns positive pulses if the data bit is a one or no pulse if the data
bit is a zero. By ORing this with the PWM pulses, which overlap with the start of
the SCK pulses, we either get a 625ns pulse if the data bit is a one or a ~300ns
pulse if it’s a zero – see Fig.b.
Unfortunately, there’s no good way to stream multiple bytes of data out using
the MSSP module; it only has a single buffer register (SSPxBUF) and you can
only initiate a transfer by writing a byte to it when the peripheral is not already
transmitting data.
We solve this by setting up a timer (Timer 4) to run from the main oscillator
with a period of 82, which is just a tiny bit longer than it takes the MSSP peripheral to transmit one byte. By initiating a series of byte transfers in the interrupt
service routine (ISR) triggered by Timer 4, we create an effectively uninterrupted
stream of data to update all the LEDs with minimal processor overhead.
Excluding the setup code, that means we only need the following code to
update all 80 RGB LEDs.
## Additional code required to update all LEDs
void __interrupt() isr(void) {
SSP1BUF = *RGBBufPtr;
if( ++RGBBufPtr == RGBBufEnd )
PIE2bits.TMR4IE = 0;
PIR2bits.TMR4IF = 0;
}
static void StartTransmission
(unsigned char* start, unsigned char* end) {
RGBBufPtr = start;
RGBBufEnd = end;
while( PIE2bits.TMR4IE )
;
TMR2 = 0;
TMR4 = 0;
PIE2bits.TMR4IE = 1;
}
This is the basic code used but it lacks the 280μs reset timer after each
transmission, implemented with a separate timer peripheral.
siliconchip.com.au
Australia's electronics magazine
Tiny LED Xmas Tree
54 x 41mm PCB
SC5181 – $2.50
Tiny LED Cap
55 x 57mm PCB
SC5687 – $3.00
Tiny LED Stocking
41 x 83mm PCB
SC5688 – $3.00
Tiny LED Reindeer
91 x 98mm PCB
SC5689 – $3.00
Tiny LED Bauble
52.5 x 45.5mm
SC5690 – $3.00
Tiny LED Sleigh
80 x 92mm PCB
SC5691 – $3.00
Tiny LED Star
57 x 54mm PCB
SC5692 – $3.00
Tiny LED Cane
84 x 60mm PCB
SC5693 – $3.00
We also sell a kit containing all
required components for just
$15 per board ➟ SC5579
December 2025 51
HOW TO DESIGN
Printed
Circuit
Boards
Part 1 by Tim Blythman
The cost of professionally made printed circuit boards
(PCBs) has dropped dramatically over the last decade,
while the available options have expanded. While we
offer PCBs we design for our projects, anyone can make
their own custom boards. So, how do you go about
turning an idea into a printed circuit board?
W
e have published several articles about PCB design and manufacturing before. However,
we haven’t really explained the entire
process of designing and ordering circuit boards from scratch. We wanted to
create a series of articles that would be
helpful for beginners as well as those
who already have some PCB design
experience.
PCB design is a discipline that is
both a science and a bit of an art. This
series will offer some techniques and
strategies, but PCB design is something that benefits from practice. This
article will also talk about processes
and terminology. It’s much easier to
find information when you know the
terms to use.
Our Making PCBs article from the
July 2019 issue (see siliconchip.au/
Article/11700) mentioned the data
and processes that are needed to create a PCB. If you’re not familiar with
how PCBs are manufactured, it could
52
Silicon Chip
be helpful to have a look at this article
to know about the underlying technology and processes.
Our review of Altium’s CircuitMaker software from January 2019 (see
siliconchip.au/Article/11378) touched
on the steps involved in using a software package to turn a circuit into a
printed circuit board. But it is not just
circuits that can become PCBs. Their
price and versatility means that custom PCBs also make excellent panels
and enclosure lids; we are sure that
they have other uses, too.
Electronics design automation
(EDA) programs generally include
tutorials and guides for getting started.
EDA software is more than just PCB
design, but that is a large part of it. This
series is more about the details that
such guides might not cover, including
ideas and processes that are involved
in good PCB design.
Our frequent reviews of the Altium
Designer software, most recently in
Australia's electronics magazine
June (siliconchip.au/Article/18307)
reveal that EDA software is continually evolving.
Altium Designer
We are going to work through the
process of PCB design using Altium
Designer. It’s the software that we use,
but most EDA packages work similarly. So even if you plan to use something else (for example, KiCad), the
concepts we discuss will be useful. To
keep things simple, we’ll stick to basic
two-layer (double-sided) designs. Simple boards like this make up the vast
majority of our designs.
Two-sided boards are so commonplace now that it isn’t worth the trouble of making a single-sided design.
The PCB manufacturers are set up
for two-sided processes, and there
are unlikely to be savings unless you
order thousands of boards. It’s possible to design for boards to be etched
by hand, but we have not done that
for many years because commercial
boards are so inexpensive.
There is a free trial option for
Altium Designer (www.altium.com/
altium-designer/free-trial/roadmap).
The related CircuitMaker package is
also free to use, but projects are stored
in Altium servers (in “the cloud”) and
are visible to other CircuitMaker users.
Helpfully, its interface is similar to
Altium Designer. See www.altium.
com/circuitmaker
Both Altium software packages
work through two distinct phases.
First, there is the process known as
‘schematic capture’. This amounts to
drawing the circuit diagram within
the software. Internally, the software
records the components that are used
and how they should be connected.
The second stage is PCB layout.
This mainly involves placing the components and traces to connect them
together. This can be likened to drawing the final PCB design. The many
circuit diagrams and PCB overlays
in our project articles are taken from
these two phases of the PCB project.
While it is possible to design a PCB
without schematic capture, it’s a far
more error-prone process, and we
don’t recommend it. The small amount
of time invested in drawing the circuit
is repaid in the much increased likelihood of your PCB working first time.
Before we get to the nitty gritty of
PCB design, let’s first look at what
we’re trying to achieve.
siliconchip.com.au
Fig.1: there are lots of
options possible when
ordering a PCB, but the
defaults are usually the
quickest and cheapest
(and fine for many uses).
We suggest sticking with
these defaults if you
haven’t designed and
ordered a PCB before.
Source: PCBWay – www.
pcbway.com/orderonline.
aspx
▶
Fig.2: Altium Designer
offers many layer stack
options, but the actual
parameters shown here
are only critical for
simulation in cases like
RF or high-speed design.
It’s simply to show how a
PCB is structured and the
information here is not
processed into the Gerber
files. The apparently
overly-precise figures are
simply imperial values
converted into metric.
Typical Gerber files for a two-layer board
Layer
Extensions
Board shape/outline
.gm, .gm1 or .gbr
Top copper
.gtl or .gbr
Top solder mask
.gts or .gbr
Top silkscreen
overlay
.gto or .gbr
Bottom copper
.gbl or .gbr
Bottom solder mask
.gbs or .gbr
Bottom silkscreen
overlay
.gbo or .gbr
PCB manufacturing
Once the PCB layout phase in
Altium Designer is complete, “Gerber” files are exported. These are what
the PCB manufacturer uses to create
the physical boards. In addition to
uploading those files (usually as a
‘ZIP’ archive), there will be various
options to choose from, such as the
colour of the solder mask on the PCB.
Fig.1 shows the ordering page, including options, of PCBWay.
It looks like a lot of choices, but
most of our designs use the defaults
as shown. These settings will typically be the cheapest and fastest PCBs
to produce.
However, it’s worth noting critical
siliconchip.com.au
parameters like minimum track width
and spacing and minimum hole size.
These are part of the so-called manufacturing capabilities. For most
designs that will be manually assembled, there should be no problem
adopting much more generous guidelines. An example can be found at
www.pcbway.com/capabilities.html
It’s important to set up ‘design rule
checks’ that match (or are at least similar to) the manufacturer’s capabilities.
This way, the software will flag anything that will cause a manufacturing
problem and allow you to fix it before
finalising the design.
Most of our designs are laid out with
margins at least double what is listed
Australia's electronics magazine
regarding things like trace width and
spacing; even the cheapest boards are
comfortably within our requirements.
However, there are cases, such as when
you’re working with fine-pitch SMD
ICs, that you have to push close to the
standard manufacturing limits.
It’s handy to know what PCB manufacturers are capable of producing.
If you’re looking to create panels, lids
and the like, there is a good range of
colours available too. Some even offer
full-colour printing on the PCB surface now!
Fig.2 shows a so-called layer stack
and its visualisation as seen in Altium
Designer. The green layers that are not
labelled are the solder mask layers;
December 2025 53
these are what actually give PCBs their
colour, as well as reducing the chance
of short circuits while soldering. At
left is a ‘via’ connecting the top and
bottom copper layers.
These seven layers roughly correspond to seven of the eight files in a
set of Gerber files. The dielectric layer
marks the fibreglass (FR-4) core, and its
file indicates the shape of the PCB. An
eighth file defines the holes that need
to be drilled in the PCB.
Most Gerber files are equivalent to
a monochrome image, with the colour
indicating whether the material on
that layer (copper, solder mask or
silkscreen printing) is present or not.
Due to the way PCBs were historically made, the actual data consists
of shapes, called apertures, which are
combined to create the final image.
Computer technology has changed
the way these steps work. The PCB
Manufacture panel gives a bit more
detail about the different files and
layers, and how they relate to the processing steps involved in PCB manufacture. See also the diagram in the
panel overleaf showing how various
PCB features are created in the various layers.
Design overview
Fig.3 shows the steps that are
required to create a PCB and the associated file types (in the square blocks)
that are used in Altium Designer. There
will probably be a set of generic component libraries available from your
EDA software, but if you are using
any components with more than three
leads, there is a good chance that you
will have to add your own entries. We
will cover that too.
Schematic capture and PCB layout
are fairly manual processes, while
the library files and design rules are a
major part of the ‘automation’ in EDA.
They help to make sure that you end
up with a valid and functional result.
Tools such as automated design rule
checking, automatic routing of traces
and hierarchical design can help to
speed up the process.
The design rules and libraries you
use might change depending on how
you intend to assemble your PCB. This
is part of the field known as ‘design for
manufacture’ (DFM). A PCB intended
for manual assembly (such as our project PCBs) could be very different from
a design intended for mass production
through pick-and-place and reflow or
wave soldering.
For example, we have created
library files with large pads and clear
silkscreen labels to make manual
assembly easier. A mass-produced
PCB might cram all the components
on one side to avoid a two-pass process. The pads will be small to require
a minimal amount of solder and may
completely omit silkscreen labels due
to lack of space.
Consider that the ideal pad size and
shape for any given component will be
different depending on how it is soldered, what solder is used and even
what other components and tracks
are nearby.
We expect most readers will produce designs for manual assembly like
us, so we will concentrate on that. It’s
possible to create multi-sheet or multiboard projects with Altium Designer,
but we’ll keep it simple, using just a
single SchDoc (schematic/circuit) file
and a single PcbDoc (board) file. We
find that this is sufficient for most our
designs.
One of the great things about going
to the trouble of drawing the circuit
in this way is that if you later have to
make changes to either the circuit or
Fig.3: these are the steps involved in the design and manufacture of a PCB. This
article concentrates on setting up libraries, while next month we will discuss
design rules and the schematic capture and PCB layout steps, followed by
Gerber file exporting and ordering.
54
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
the board, the software will check that
they match up. So, for example, if you
remove a bunch of tracks to move components, then forget to add one back,
it will tell you. You don’t want to find
out about it when your new board revision doesn’t work!
That’s a lot of background, but we
hope that it will provide some insight
into why things are done as they are.
It’s also the case that there is no single correct way to lay out a PCB; we
shall describe the workflow that we
find works best for us, but you may
decide to vary it once you have some
experience.
Libraries
Good libraries are the foundation of
a solid PCB project, so we should start
with how to create and use libraries.
The Altium Academy channel has a
video titled “How To Create Your Own
Libraries in Altium Designer” (https://
youtu.be/bOi45nshqP8). Altium can
use integrated libraries, but commonly, you will see separate SchLib
(symbol) and PcbLib (footprint) files.
The schematic library consists of the
circuit diagram symbols for various
components. They are usually also be
linked with specific footprints in the
PcbLib file. A footprint corresponds
to a physical component package so,
for example, the same TO-220 footprint could be used for many component types, such as bipolar transistors,
Mosfets, voltage regulators, diodes
and so on.
There can also be multiple footprints for a given package. Our libraries have variants of the TO-220 package footprint for vertical mounting,
horizontal mounting, and with the tab
affixed to the PCB using a screw. There
are also variants that make provision
for a heatsink to be added (possibly
even including pads to solder heatsink retaining pins into).
The visual representation is important for helping to understand the circuit diagram, but the pins and external connections (such as exposed pads
and mounting points) are probably the
most critical part. As we go along, keep
the Properties tab open so that you are
aware of all the different parameters
that relate to the elements that you are
working with.
Fig.4 shows a 74HC595 shift register IC in our SchLib file. The main
image shows how it would appear in
the circuit during schematic capture.
siliconchip.com.au
▶
Fig.5: you can configure
your schematic (circuit)
symbols however you
like. You might see
many components laid
out like this to neaten
the resulting diagrams.
Real ICs often have
pins in odd places due
to silicon limitations;
while you can make the
symbols reflect that, it
isn’t necessary.
Fig.4: setting up your libraries will also give you practice in working with the schematic
capture and PCB layout tools, since they use similar environments.
At lower left are three linked footprints (in a separate PcbLib file); note
how they correspond to three different
package types.
Pin 15 is selected in the main window, and at right are the pin properties, with the mouse pointer selecting from the pin type menu. By making sure this property is set correctly,
you can avoid improper connections
during schematic capture.
The rules will flag cases when a conflict is created, such as when two outputs are connected together, or if an
input is not driven by anything. You
can also see that the pins on the part
show directional arrows for inputs
and outputs. A bidirectional pin (such
as a microcontroller’s general purpose I/O pin) will show arrows both
in and out.
The pin names are shown inside
the rectangle, and the pin designators
(numbers in this case) outside. The
designators are what connects a specific pin to a pad within a footprint.
This example shows the pins
arranged identically to their physical layout. This is not a requirement;
other arrangements can be used. Fig.5
shows a CD4017 decade counter with
inputs on the left and outputs on the
right. The positive supply is at the top
and the negative supply at the bottom.
siliconchip.com.au
This arrangement will almost certainly make the circuit diagram in the
SchDoc file neater, but it means that
the circuit is less like the PCB layout.
However, remember that the point of
a schematic diagram is to most clearly
represent the function of a circuit, and
often that’s quite distinct from the best
physical layout on the circuit board.
The various components are referenced by their names (design item IDs),
so it is important to give unique names
to each component. We have adopted
the convention of prefixing each name
with an underscore to ensure that they
are distinct from Altium’s included
libraries – see Fig.6.
The numerical pin designators that
you see are typical for ICs and indeed
most components, but this field is a
character string, so could be “A” or
“K” for the anode or cathode of a diode.
“A1” or “A2” could be used for the two
anodes of a common-cathode diode.
You can also see another very handy
feature in Fig.6: components can also
be broken into various parts (Part A,
Part B etc). In the case of this hex
inverter, it makes it easier to swap
between using different inverter elements (using a dropdown menu) if
this is needed to simplify PCB routing.
Parts can also be used to separate
logically distinct parts of a component, such as a relay’s contacts and
its coil. Altium Designer can handle
Fig.6: multi-part components allow flexibility in swapping equivalent sub-parts.
Being able to separate the sub-parts can also help in creating a tidy schematic.
Australia's electronics magazine
December 2025 55
Fig.7: reading and interpreting
engineering drawings such
as these is a handy skill if
you need to create your own
footprint libraries. Source:
Infineon Technologies – www.
infineon.com/assets/row/public/
documents/10/49/infineonbtn8962ta-ds-en.pdf
automated pin swapping if you do not
wish to do it manually.
The schematic editor always works
on a 50mil (50/1000in or 1.27mm) grid,
so you should make sure that all pins
fall on this grid spacing by setting the
grid snap. This will make it easier to
drag-and-drop wires while editing the
schematic. It’s easy to switch between
metric and imperial units with the ‘Q’
hotkey.
Even components that aren’t connected electrically can be created as
components, since the schematic editor can be used to generate a bill of
materials (BoM); for example, screws
& spacers for mounting. Having a component that can be dropped into the
SchDoc file means that it is automatically included in the bill of materials.
It’s also a good idea to make sure
the names and descriptions are apt,
so that the BoM is clear.
Something with no electrical connections, like an enclosure, could have
a footprint with a 3D body associated,
and it would be visible in the 3D view
of the PCB and generate an item in the
BoM. The enclosure’s footprint could
also include a template of the PCB outline so that the PCB’s features can be
aligned to the enclosure.
56
Silicon Chip
Similarly, components can be
marked as ‘no BoM’, meaning they
do not generate an entry in the bill of
materials. An example of this would
be a PCB trace antenna or inductor;
there is no separate item that needs
to be purchased as the component is
effectively part of the PCB.
You don’t need to worry about all
these ideas right away, but it’s handy
to be aware of them when you are creating and editing your library files.
This will help make PCB layout go
smoothly.
Footprints
Critical parts of the footprints in
the PCB library are the copper layer
pads that correspond to the pins in
the schematic library. You can also
include objects on any layer of the
final PCB, and even 3D bodies, which
can be used to create quite realistic 3D
views of the PCB.
By default, the pad designators are
matched to the pin designators, but
this can be changed if necessary. For
simplicity, we try to keep our libraries so that the pin and pad designators match.
Creating a footprint from scratch
generally requires the component data
Australia's electronics magazine
sheet to provide the recommended
pad geometry. Fig.7 shows the relevant page from the data sheet for the
BTN8962 half-bridge driver, with the
manufacturer’s suggested pad layout
diagram at lower right.
Manufacturer-recommended footprints are usually quite compact; we
would consider lengthening some of
the pads to ease soldering.
We’ve found that these sort of diagrams need to be studied quite carefully. The pad sizes are clear enough,
but because Altium Designer’s coordinate system is based on the centre
of the pads, the pad coordinates will
need to be deduced. Note that the pad
pitch (which will match the distances
between pad centres) is not shown at
lower right, but it is marked elsewhere.
The Properties tab comes in handy
here, since you can directly enter the
coordinates that you have calculated.
Multiple pads in a row can be selected
together and lined up by entering
a coordinate that is used for all of
them. Although many programs use
Ctrl+click to add items to a selection,
Altium Designer uses Shift+click for
this purpose.
For example, we can easily lay out
the lower row of pads by putting the
centre pad at a zero X-coordinate. The
other pads can be placed at multiples
of the 1.27mm (50 thou/mil or 0.05in)
pin pitch. Knowing metric and imperial equivalents can come in handy.
Setting the grid snap to match the
pin pitch (or a fraction of it) can also
be helpful.
You might find an existing footprint
in another library that will work, especially if it is a reasonably common
type. Altium Designer also has two
different footprint creation wizard
tools, found under the Tools menu.
These work quite well for packages
that have a regular pin arrangement.
Otherwise, the process of creating a
footprint is similar to that for a symbol.
The pads are placed as needed, with
their shape, size and hole diameter
defined. There is no need to manually
lay out the solder mask layer, since the
pads include both copper and solder
mask elements.
Silkscreen designators will be added
by Altium Designer automatically
during the PCB layout stage. Adding
just the eight pad elements here will
be sufficient to create a functional part.
Our libraries include additional
component outlines on the silkscreen
siliconchip.com.au
The PCB Manufacturing Process
This is a brief overview of the files in
a Gerber set and how they are used to
physically create a board. This is for a
two-layer PCB; boards with more layers
simply have extra files. Often, the PCBs
will be laid out in a large panel, possibly with other different designs, with
the final step being to separate the PCBs
from the panel before shipping them to
customers.
Our explanation below will necessarily be simplified. The steps shown
adjacent are from PCBWay’s website.
They also have videos showing the
details of each of these steps. Note that
steps 3-6 only apply to multi-layer
(more than two-layer) boards. You can
see the videos at www.pcbway.com/
pcb-service.html
The process starts with a large panel
of copper-clad FR-4 fibreglass laminate.
The most common PCBs use a copper
thickness of 0.025mm, which is equivalent to 1oz (28g) of copper per square
foot bonded to 1.5mm thick fibreglass
(resulting in a nominally 1.6mm finished PCB). Thicker copper layers can
be created by electroplating.
The first step is to drill and plate the
plated holes. These are holes that connect the two sides of a PCB, and might be
part of a via or through-hole pad. Thus,
they will connect copper areas on both
sides of the PCB.
The drill locations are stored in an
‘NC drill file’; NC stands for numerical
control and the format is quite similar
to the GCODE commands that are used
to drive CNC machines, including 3D
printers. Altium exports these with a
TXT file extension, and they are readable with a text editor (like the Gerber
files).
The drill file itself makes no distinction between plated and nonplated holes. Instead, it is assumed
that holes that end inside a copper area
at both ends are plated, while those
that end in areas without copper are
Ground Pour: polygon
on top of copper layer
This shows the numerous steps
involved in manufacturing a PCB.
Source: PCBWay – www.
pcbway.com/pcb-service.
html
non-plated. Holes
that are ambiguous will
probably be flagged as errors by the PCB
engineers. (Sometimes people put plated
and non-plated holes in separate files.)
The design rules typically specify a
minimum annular ring (around a hole)
that ensures the distinction is clear. Some
holes, especially those that aren’t round,
such as slotted or irregular shapes, might
be defined in the outline layer (GMx file).
These are also made at this stage, using
a milling machine.
The holes are then plated. A chemical
process adds a thin layer of copper, which
is then thickened by electroplating. Electroplating is much easier to do while there
are solid conducting areas of copper on
both sides of a PCB.
The next step is to etch the copper
layers. First, resist layers are applied to
the top and bottom of the board using a
dry film process similar to DIY PCB etching. Transparency masks are computer-
generated from the GTL (top layer) and
GBL (bottom layer) Gerber files and
printed. The resist is cured using the
transparencies, and the uncured resist
is removed to allow the etchant to act on
the copper.
Then, the solder mask layers are
applied. The apertures in the solder mask
Gerber files (GTS and GBS) are used to
mark where there are holes in the solder
SMD Pad: usually square on top
copper and solder mask layers
TH Pad: shapes (circles,
rectangles or stadium)
on copper
and solder
mask layers
possibly with
a throughhole
VIA: like a TH pad,
PCB ID:
Non-Plated Hole: drill hole
Designators: text on but with no solder
text on top
not surrounded by copper
silkscreen layer
mask opening
copper layer
The anatomy of a printed circuit board. Various items on the PCB are created from
elements in different layers here. Fortunately, most EDA programs will manage all
the elements when a pad is placed on the PCB.
siliconchip.com.au
Australia's electronics magazine
mask, so it works
in the opposite (negative) fashion to the other
layers, which normally mark
where the material should remain.
The etched PCBs are coated with a
film of liquid solder mask ink. The ink
is selectively cured by exposing it to
ultraviolet (UV) light from a projector.
This technology is similar to that used
in resin 3D printing. The uncured resin
is cleaned off, and the remaining ink
may be cured further.
It’s at this stage that a surface finish may be applied to the bare copper
to prevent it oxidising and to improve
solderability. We use the HASL (hot air
solder level) treatment on the majority
of our boards. This involves dipping the
entire board into liquid solder, where
it adheres to the exposed copper. The
excess solder is then blown off using
hot air.
A different process called ENIG (electroless nickel immersion gold) uses a
chemical process to plate a thin layer
of nickel onto the copper. Another
chemical step then plates gold over the
nickel. The nickel layer is needed so
that the reaction that deposits the gold
can proceed.
The silkscreen overlays are added
next (GTO and GBO layers). These also
use a UV-reactive ink that works like
the solder mask layer, except that it is
exposed and printed in a positive fashion. The liquid silkscreen is applied
and selectively cured. Excess ink is
washed away, and the remaining ink
is fully cured.
The remaining unplated holes and
slots are then cut, drilled or routed as
needed, using the TXT and GMx layers. This will include the board outline,
and will thus result in the board being
removed from its panel.
There may be a number of different
test and inspection steps that occur
during the process. AOI (automatic optical inspection) can be used to compare
the board appearance to that expected
from the Gerber files, while various electrical tests can be used to ensure that
the traces have no breaks or short circuits. Once the board has passed testing,
it is complete, and it will be packaged
and shipped.
December 2025 57
layer to ease assembly of the PCB. They
also make it easier to see conflicts, such
as where components would overlap,
for example. You can add unconnected
mounting or clearance holes. Like the
symbol pins, these are usually marked
as such by using the ‘0’ designator.
Manufacturer Part Search
Many manufacturers now supply
library files, so it is easier to use their
parts. Thus, it’s worth mentioning
the Manufacturer Part Search feature
of Altium Designer. It can be opened
from the Panels button. Some, but not
all, components can be added to your
libraries by simply downloading them
from the internet.
Fig.8 shows this panel, along with a
search for BTN8962 half-bridge driver
IC. You can see that the listed part
name has its full suffix shown, since
we need to be specific about which particular package we wish to import. The
dropdown labelled “12 SPNs” refers to
supplier part numbers; you can click
through here to see the listed part at a
supplier like Mouser or DigiKey.
The search has two results, and the
top result includes the models we need
for our libraries. The second result
with the red struck-out icon does not
contain models, and will not help us.
Models are visible below that, with
the schematic symbol followed by the
footprints.
You can download the models by
right-clicking on the listed item and
selecting the option to ‘Download as
File Library’. The download is a ZIP
file containing several library items.
We find it easy to simply open each
library file and to copy and paste the
items into our own libraries, where
they can then be edited as needed.
For example, we would change
the symbol name to fit our naming
scheme. You can also see that the footprint library contains three different
footprints. If in doubt, choose the “L”
low-density variant, since this will be
the easiest to manually solder. The “N”
variant is what would likely be used
for a mass-produced PCB.
You should also check the footprints
on downloaded models to be sure that
the layers correspond to your conventions. We typically use mechanical
layer 15 (GM15) for the board outline, but some models use this for the
component courtyard (outline). If this
were not changed, we might end up
with holes all over the PCB, since we
58
Silicon Chip
also use that layer for unplated slots
(routed out of the PCB).
Making footprints
Items like connectors will probably
need to be made from scratch unless
a downloadable model is available,
since they can vary so much. Many
SMD connectors also include throughhole mounting pads, so they will need
a mix of pads.
Most surface-mounting pads simply exist on the top layer (and can be
flipped onto the bottom layer with
the component). They are automatically allocated a matching solder mask
outline, which is expanded slightly to
ensure that the pad is fully uncovered,
even if there is a slight misalignment.
Thus, you don’t need to worry about
creating separate items in the copper
and solder mask layers.
Through-holes are created as a
‘Multi-layer’ item, which includes a
drill hole (with settable diameter) and
top and bottom layer pads, which can
be various shapes including square,
round or lozenge-shaped. The two
layers are matched in size by default,
but each can be set separately. You can
also offset the hole centre from the pad
centre if needed.
We prefer to work with through-hole
parts in imperial dimensions, since
many components are on a 100mil
(0.1in or 2.54mm) pitch. A non-plated
hole can be created by setting the pad
(copper) layers to have an X-Size and
Y-Size of zero. Such a hole could be
used for a mounting screw or LED to
pass through.
It’s a good idea to centre your footprints on the origin (0,0) and arrange
them symmetrically if possible. By all
means, copy and paste existing footprints (and symbols), then modify
them. It will make things easier and
will ensure that the style of your components remains consistent.
Altium Designer also supports
many layers beyond the ones that
are needed for PCB manufacturing.
Layer Mechanical-1 is often used for
so-called 3D bodies, which are the
entities used to create 3D views of the
components.
The simplest of these are extruded
shapes, such as a rectangle extruded
vertically to form a cuboid, or a circle
extruded into a cylinder. Adding even
a single 3D body to each component
will allow you to better visualise a
completed board. In Fig.8, our downloaded model of the BTN8962 includes
a simple cuboid 3D body.
We often use Mechanical-14 for
reference marks and ‘fiducials’. For
designs that are mounted in an enclosure, we can mark its walls so that
things like jacks and sockets can be
aligned correctly. They can also be
used to help create the cutting and
drilling diagrams, since dimensions
and coordinates can be directly read
from the Properties.
Summary
Fig.8: the Manufacturer Part Search
can remove the need to do a lot of
the work in creating components
and footprints within your libraries.
However, not all components are
supported, and we recommend
thoroughly checking the imported
files for correctness and consistency.
Next month, we will look at some
of the strategies we use for designing
PCBs, both during schematic capture
and PCB layout. This will also include
aspects such as PCB design rules.
We will follow with the steps
involved in finalising your Gerber files
and sending them away to be manufactured. In the meantime, you can start
SC
building your libraries.
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
X 0213
X 3260
SAVE 20%
NEW!
40
24.95
$
$
X 0232
SAVE 37%
50
$
5m Flexible Camping Strip Light Kit
Great for setting up temporary lighting in tents,
awnings, gazebos etc. Simply secure it to your
tent poles and plug it into a 12V power source.
Handy 3 in 1 Torch
& USB Battery Bank
Ideal for camping, roadside
emergencies and around the home. It can be used as an
LED lantern, torch, emergency light and USB battery
bank. 4800mAh internal battery.
Folding LED Lantern Light
Ideal for camping, roadside emergencies
and much more! Innovative folding design
includes a central LED lamp with fold-out side
panels. USB C rechargeable.
Summer Just Got Brighter!
WITH THE GENLAMP® LIGHTING RANGE
SAVE $10
X 2384
X 2391
39.95
$
SAVE 18%
2 for
$
44
SAVE 17%
2 for
$
66
X 2390
Pen Light
with Lantern
Need a reliable torch
that fits right in your
pocket? This compact
pen light packs a
powerful 3W, 190-lumen
beam with up to 40m
range and adjustable focus.
Perfect for work, travel, or
everyday carry.
SAVE 25%
Cable Free Solar Security Light
Caravan Oyster Lights
Lights up to 80sq/m with this powerful multi panel LED light
which requires no wiring and is powered by the sun! IP65 rated
for outdoor use. Great for the garden or driveway. 600 lumens.
Weather resistant 12V input LED lights.
Pure white 5500K. X2390: 180mm.
X2391: 125mm with switch.
14.95
$
X 0235
Colourful Neon Flex Rope just $79 a roll.
Use it in long lengths for stunning coloured lighting effects or cut and shape into your own custom “neon” signs.
Super flex design for tight radius bends, IP65 weather resistant. 5m rolls. X 3301 - X 3305.
SAVE 33%
20
2 for $
6W Solar
Outdoor
Light
SAVE 26%
25
2 for $
SAVE 33%
X 2388
X 0221
Clip-On LED
Adventure Light
Features multiple light
modes & bottle opener.
20
2 for $
X 2389
Solar Deck Light
Solar Step Light
Fully sealed design. Turns on in the
dark to provide low level lighting for
decks, paths etc. 109Øx22mm
Fully sealed design. Turns on in the
dark to provide low level lighting for
steps, letterbox etc. 100x88x50mm
Fantastic for
highlighting garden
features, trees and
landscaping, this
powerful solar light
needs no wiring and
and can be used in
ground or attached to
the wall. Flood/spot
modes. 6-7hr run time.
IP67 rated.
X 2385
SAVE 29%
39
$
Your
Yourelectronics
electronicssupplier
suppliersince
since1976.
1976.
Shop
in-store
atat
one
ofof
our
1111locations
around
Australia:
Shop
in-store
one
our
locations
around
Australia:
WA
» PERTH
» JOONDALUP
» CANNINGTON
» MIDLAND
» MYAREE
» BALCATTA
WA
» PERTH
» JOONDALUP
» CANNINGTON
» MIDLAND
» MYAREE
» BALCATTA
VIC
» SPRINGVALE
» AIRPORT
WEST
» VIRGINIA
» AUBURN
» PROSPECT
VIC
» SPRINGVALE
» AIRPORT
WESTQLD
QLD
» VIRGINIANSW
NSW
» AUBURNSASA
» PROSPECT
Or
Orshop
shoponline
online24/7
24/7<at><at>altronics.com.au
altronics.com.au
®®
Build
BuildItItYourself
YourselfElectronics
ElectronicsCentre
Centre
© Altronics 2024. E&OE. Prices stated herein are only valid until 31/12/24 or until stocks run out. Prices include GST and exclude freight and insurance. See latest catalogue for freight rates.
© Altronics 2025. E&OE. Prices stated here in are only valid until 31/12/25 or until stocks run out. Prices include GST and exclude freight and insurance. See latest catalogue for freight rates.
Image source: https://unsplash.com/photos/aerial-photography-of-flowers-at-daytime-TRhGEGdw-YY
Earrth Ra
Ea
Rad
dio
John Clarke’s
Parrt 1 : w�
Pa
w�ispe
isperrs of
of the sk
sky
With this ‘natural radio receiver’, you can listen to solar and atmospheric
disturbances, like storms or auroras. These create electromagnetic waves in the
VLF (very low frequency) and ELF (extra low frequency) range.
I
ntriguing natural sounds such
as whistlers, tweeks and the chorus can be heard using this simple
receiver.
Naturally produced electromagnetic waves are abundant throughout
the world, and are there for the listening with the right equipment. Not
only can you hear the sounds that are
created in your local region, but even
from other parts of the world! These
low-frequency electromagnetic waves,
often created in the Earth’s atmosphere, are guided by the ionosphere
that encircles the globe.
The waves are reflected or refracted
off the ionosphere, and can travel halfway around the world, all just waiting
to be received and listened to.
Our portable Earth Radio is powered by an internal or external battery
and can receive most of the VLF and
ELF frequencies covering the 3Hz to
30kHz bands. These are at the lower
part of the electromagnetic spectrum,
as shown in Fig.1. We only show frequencies on the spectrum down to
1Hz, although electromagnetic waves
can be even lower in frequency than
that.
The electromagnetic spectrum
covers a huge range of frequencies,
including much higher frequencies
such as broadcast radio waves (~1100MHz), microwaves (300MHz+),
infrared (300GHz+) and visible light
(400-790THz). The higher-frequency
waves have more energy, which is why
UV, X-rays and gamma rays can cause
skin and cell damage.
To pick up the naturally produced
VLF and ELF signals, we use a loop
antenna. Its advantage is that it is small
enough to be portable despite the low
wavelengths involved. Outputs on the
Fig.1: electromagnetic waves span a huge range of frequencies, from 1Hz and below (ELF) up to 1026Hz (gamma rays). The
range we’re interested in here is from 20Hz to 22kHz, within the ELF and VLF bands.
60
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
Fig.2: there are several
ionised layers in the
ionosphere, and they change
between day and night. Without
particles from the sun to keep
them ionised, some layers disappear
at night, while others move and/or
become thinner.
receiver include one for recording,
with another suitable for listening via
headphones or earphones.
The Earth Radio receives signals
due to atmospheric phenomena and
also from the sun. The most significant
atmospheric source is lightning. Lightning generates a wide range of electromagnetic waves, including light, radio
waves, X-rays and gamma rays. The
radio waves they produce extend into
the VLF frequency range (3-30kHz)
and some in the ELF range (3Hz-3kHz).
Another source is geomagnetic
storms. These are disturbances created
by the coupling of the Earth’s magnetic
field with the solar wind. The solar
wind is produced by solar flares and
other sun irregularities, such as coronal mass ejections. They can cause
changes in the Earth’s magnetosphere
(magnetic field), and as a result, induce
currents into a receiving antenna.
Apart from electromagnetic wave
production, these events can also
result in auroral (visible) displays.
They are known as the Aurora Borealis (Northern Lights) in the northern hemisphere and Aurora Australis (Southern Lights) in the southern
hemisphere.
siliconchip.com.au
Earth Radio Kit (SC7582, $55)
this kit includes all non-optional
parts, except for the case, battery,
timber and cable/wire.
Practical uses of the ELF and VLF
electromagnetic bands are transmitters
for communications with submarines
and around the world (as described in
our article on Underwater Communication in March 2023 – siliconchip.
au/Article/15691).
Other man-made sources of these
low-frequency radio waves aren’t
necessarily wanted. These include
50/60Hz mains hum and somewhat
higher-frequency signals produced by
electronic equipment like computers
and electric motors.
One of the main reasons that the signals from lightning and solar activity
can be interesting is due to the ionosphere that surrounds the Earth. This
layer of the atmosphere provides a
waveguide for the VLF and ELF waves
to travel within. They effectively
bounce off the ionosphere and the
Earth as they travel around the globe.
For example, signals produced by
lightning start out as a static noise.
But by the time they are received, the
waveforms may have morphed into
different sounds such as tweeks, whistlers and the chorus. The original static
sound is altered by the pathways they
take before being received.
Australia's electronics magazine
Changes in the ionosphere between
night and day, and the strengthening of
ionospheric regions due to solar flares
and coronal mass ejection events, also
contribute to variations in the sounds
received. So the ionosphere has a large
impact on the sounds produced.
The ionosphere
The ionosphere (Fig.2) is the region
of the atmosphere where the gases are
ionised (split up into positively and
negatively charged particles) by solar
and cosmic radiation. It ranges from
70-1000km above the Earth’s surface,
and is generally considered as being
made up of three regions: D, E, and F.
The F region splits into two layers
(F1 and F2) during the daylight hours,
but merges into a single layer during
the night.
Ionisation is strongest in the upper
F region, and weakest in the lower D
region; the latter basically exists only
during daylight hours.
During daylight hours, VLF and ELF
signals generally pass through the D
region and are refracted by (or reflect
off) the E region, leading to a weakened signal. The D region is stronger
during a solar flare event and acts as
December 2025 61
a waveguide for VLF and ELF signals.
This is because the wavelength of these
signals is a significant fraction of the
height of the D region.
For example, a 20kHz electromagnetic wave has a wavelength of 15km,
while a 2kHz wave has a 150km wavelength.
With a strong D region in the ionosphere, these signals refract off it, and
less loss is experienced, since they no
longer pass through the D region to
refract in the E region. This generally
leads to a sudden increase in received
signal, called ‘sudden ionospheric disturbance’ (SID).
Some ELF and VLF signals manage
to exit the ionosphere, where they
will follow the magnetic field lines of
the magnetosphere. They can reach
10,000km or more above the Earth
before re-entering at a different location.
There are several types of emissions
possible, which are characterised as
static, tweeks, whistlers, the chorus
and hiss.
Spectrograms
Signals from our Earth Radio or
from recorded sources can be visualised with spectrograph software. Three
examples of audio files and spectrograms are shown in Figs.3, 4 & 5. Figs.3
& 4 are spectrograms of the audio files
at www.spaceweather.com/glossary/
inspire.html, while Fig.5 was captured
using our Earth Radio.
Fig.5 consists mainly of close-by
lightning statics. The horizontal red
line at just under 20kHz is from the
VLF radio station in Exmouth, Western Australia, under the call sign of
NWC. It transmits on a 19.8kHz carrier.
The expanded view of the NWC
radio station signal in Fig.5(a) shows
how the encoding uses a variation of
frequency-shift keying (FSK) modulation called minimum-shift keying.
Here, there is a 50Hz change between
a ‘0’ and a ‘1’.
Static
Lightning strike statics (sometimes
called sferics, short for “atmospherics”) are the signals from lightning that
most people will be familiar with. This
is the sound you will hear on an AM
radio during an electrical storm – constant crackling and popping.
Static signals are from nearby lightning strikes, within about 1,000km.
They are seen on a spectrogram (with
frequency on the vertical axis and
time on the horizontal axis) as vertical
lines. This indicates that all frequency
components in the signal arrive at the
same time.
Tweeks
Tweeks are lightning-caused electromagnetic emissions that have travelled
around 2000km or more within the
waveguide between the Earth and the
ionosphere. The ionosphere varies in
its properties throughout its thickness,
The Earth Radio can run off an internal 9V
battery or external 12V
source.
62
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
so higher-frequency components travel
faster than others and thus will be
received sooner than the others.
Fig.3 shows a spectrogram of both
static and tweeks. The tweeks are
characterised by frequencies around
2kHz being delayed compared to other
frequencies. These sounds are reminiscent of the Australian bell miner
bird call.
This spectrogram was produced
using the Raven Lite 2 spectrograph
software. The top waveform is the
approximately 14-second-long audio
signal. The lower spectrogram shows
how its frequency components change
over time.
The tweeks have a vertical line at
high frequencies, but at lower frequencies, they curve off to the right a
little at around 2kHz. This indicates
that the lower frequencies arrive later
at the receiver compared to other frequencies. This results in a somewhat
musical twang quality to the sound.
Whistlers
Like tweeks, whistlers have a musical quality. This is due to the longer propagation delay of their lower-
frequency components compared to
the higher frequencies. This leads to
different frequency components of the
signal becoming offset in time.
It is the interaction of the signal
with both the ionosphere and magnetosphere that causes the longer time
delay for the different frequency components. Whistler signals travel along
the magnetic field lines of the Earth,
and can go to the opposite side of the
Earth before returning.
Since the path along magnetic field
lines is very long (as much as three
Earth diameters), the time delay differences are large, and the signal begins
as a high-pitched tone, reducing to a
lower pitch over time. It is likened to
that of a falling bomb. Each whistler
sound can last for as long as a couple
of seconds. They are seen as long
descending arcs on a spectrogram
in the Fig.4 spectrogram.
Again made using Raven Lite
2, the waveform shows whistlers intermixed with static.
Each static signal is visible as
a vertical line covering most of
the frequency spectrum. Whistlers have a more musical quality than the tweeks in Fig.2 due to
the propagation differences of more
frequency components of the signal.
siliconchip.com.au
Different frequency components of the
signal become offset over time.
Note how the lower the frequency,
the longer the time delay. There is
about two seconds between the arrival
of frequencies above 10kHz before
the 1kHz component of that signal is
received!
Chorus
Two types of ‘choruses’ can occasionally be heard: the dawn chorus and
the auroral chorus. The dawn chorus
is best listened to at sunrise, and can
resemble crickets or a chorus of birds,
or it may sound like dogs barking or
squawks from flocks of birds.
It comprises a range of overlapping
sounds. The signals on a spectrogram
show quick-rising arcs of less than a
second each in duration. Its presence
is dependent upon geomagnetic activity, such as the emission of a solar flare
from the sun.
The auroral chorus is generated
within the aurora, and can be heard in
areas close to where the aurora occurs.
It is strongest during periods of high
geomagnetic activity. A recording of a
“VLF auroral chorus” (plus other natural radio sounds) is at www.youtube.
com/MindOverMatter55/videos
Fig.3: a spectrogram of an atmospheric recording that includes ‘tweeks’, sounds
produced by the static from lightning crashes travelling around the globe, with
the higher-frequency components travelling faster and thus arriving earlier.
Source: www.spaceweather.com/glossary/inspire.html
Hiss
These sounds are typically emitted
via the aurora and are high-pitched
sounding. Hiss can also originate in
the magnetosphere.
When to listen
Natural Radio signals can be heard
at any time but are most prevalent
before dawn. Tweeks are most common at night, and the chorus can be
heard within several hours of sunrise.
The results are usually better when
there is strong geomagnetic activity.
Sferics can be heard constantly at
any time.
If you want to find out the best times
to be listening, there are websites
such as www.abelian.org/vlf/index.
php?page=live where natural radio
events and solar and sunspot activity
are logged.
For events that occur within Australia, there is a page at www.facebook.
com/groups/1953353338413426/ plus
alerts and warnings for solar and geomagnetic activity and auroras on the
Bureau of Meteorology website (Australia; www.sws.bom.gov.au/Space_
Weather).
siliconchip.com.au
Fig.4: this shows whistlers, which are similar to tweeks, but they have travelled
further. As a result, their component frequencies are more spread out over time.
Fig.5: some lightning statics captured with our Earth Radio
prototype, along with the 19.8kHz signal from NWC in
Exmouth, WA. The zoomed-in view shows its FSK/MSK
modulation scheme, with the carrier varying by 50Hz to
indicate different bits.
Fig.6: this block diagram shows the stages of the radio. Current from the loop antenna is converted directly into a
voltage signal, then higher frequencies and 50/60Hz hum are removed. It is further amplified and can be listened to using
headphones/earphones or recorded with an audio recording device.
Other countries should have similar
indicators of space weather conditions.
Natural radio receivers
There are several well-documented
receivers that are designed to receive
the VLF and ELF electromagnetic
bands. These include the interactive
NASA space physics ionosphere radio
experiments (Inspire) VLF receiver
(https://theinspireproject.org).
This is available as a kit of parts and
is meant to ‘inspire’ school and university students to take an interest in and
study science, technology, engineering and mathematics (STEM) subjects.
The American Radio Relay League
(ARRL) magazine QEX also has several
articles and designs on VLF receivers;
the January/February and the March/
April publications in 2010 are of interest. The first is entitled Radio Astronomy Projects by Jon Wallace and the
second Amateur Radio Astronomy
Projects; A Whistler Radio by Jon
Wallace.
These two publications are available at www.qsl.net/w/wb4kdi/AROL/
ARRL/QEX/
There is also Renato Romero’s home
page at www.vlf.it with articles and
designs exploring the ELF and VLF
radio bands. Everyday Practical Electronics magazine (EPE) in the UK had
an Atmospherics monitor that was
a receiver for the VLF band in their
April 2003 issue (www.pemag.au/
projects-legacy.html).
One of the difficulties with VLF and
ELF receivers is that the wavelengths
are so long (15,000km for 20Hz and
15km for 20kHz). This makes using
a ¼-wave whip antenna impractical;
any antenna of any practical length
will be so much shorter than this that
it will only provide a low signal level.
An alternative to a ¼-wave whip is
the Marconi “T” antenna. One suitable
for ELF to VLF waves comprises an
11m high antenna with a 45m beam
at the top. However, this is still very
large and is certainly not portable. See
siliconchip.au/link/ac8q for more
information on these antennas.
We envisaged using a loop antenna
that gave comparable reception to a
Marconi ‘T’ antenna but without the
huge size. It is based upon “AN EASY
VLF LOOP, 200Hz-20kHz reception
without transformers” by R. Romero
& M. Bruno (see www.vlf.it/easyloop/_
easyloop.htm).
Another advantage of a loop antenna
is that it is directional, so interference
noise, especially mains-derived noise,
can sometimes be nulled out to a large
extent.
Radio design
Natural radio VLF and ELF band
receivers are rather unique because
most of the frequency range of the
VLF to ELF bands is within the audio
frequency range of 20Hz-20kHz. This
allows the signals to be directly heard
by simply converting the electromagnetic waves to sound using headphones or earphones after the signal
from the antenna has been amplified
sufficiently.
Radio receivers designed for the
AM broadcast band (530-1700kHz)
and higher frequencies are well above
the audio band. In these cases, audio
signals are used to modulate the high-
frequency carrier. Modulation varies
the carrier level for AM (amplitude
modulation) or the frequency for FM
(frequency modulation). The receiver
demodulates the received signal to
recover the audio.
Receiver block diagram
The loop antenna is held on a timber frame and is intended to be portable so
you can find an ideal place to use it.
Fig.6 shows the block diagram of our
Earth Radio. The loop antenna receives
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
64
Silicon Chip
Parts List – Earth Radio
Fig.7 shows the full circuit. It uses
seven op amps in three packages (one
single, one double and one quadruple). Some provide amplification,
some active filtering, with another
to drive headphones or an earphone
via current-boosting transistors. The
receiver is powered either by a 9V
battery or an external 12V DC supply.
When a DC plug is inserted into barrel socket CON4, its internal switch
disconnects the 9V battery’s negative
terminal from circuit ground. Without the plug inserted, the 9V battery is
1 double-sided, plated-through PCB coded 06110251, 97 × 70mm
1 105 × 80 × 40mm Hammond RM2005LTBK, Multicomp MP004809 or
RS Pro ABS translucent enclosure [RS 198-1379, Mouser 546-RM2005LTBK]
1 9V battery with matching snap (BAT1)
1 9V battery holder clip [Altronics S5050]
3 3.5mm stereo PCB mount jack sockets [Altronics P0092, Jaycar PS0133]
(CON1-CON3)
1 2.1mm or 2.5mm inner diameter PCB-mount DC power socket (CON4)
2 SPDT right-angle PCB-mount sub-miniature toggle switches (S1, S2)
[Altronics S1421]
2 8-pin DIL IC sockets
1 14-pin DIL IC socket
1 M3 × 5mm panhead or countersunk screw and nut
1 100mm-long cable tie
2 1mm PCB pins (optional)
Potentiometers
3 100kW top-adjust 3296W style trimpot (VR1, VR2, VR8)
2 50kW top-adjust 3296W style trimpot (VR3, VR5)
1 2kW top-adjust 3296W style trimpot (VR4)
1 10kW top-adjust 3296W style trimpot (VR6)
1 10kW logarithmic taper 18-tooth spline 10mm horizontal PCB-mounting
potentiometer (VR7) [Altronics R1935, Jaycar RP8756]
1 13mm knob for VR7
Semiconductors
1 OP07CP low-noise precision op amp, DIP-8 (IC1) [Jaycar ZL3974]
1 TL074 quad JFET-input op amp, DIP-14 (IC2)
1 TL072 dual JFET-input op amp, DIP-8 (IC3)
1 BC337 45V 0.8A NPN transistor, TO-92 (Q1)
1 BC327 45V 0.8A PNP transistor, TO-92 (Q2)
2 1N4148 75V 200mA silicon diodes, DO-35 (D1, D2)
1 1N5819 30V 1A schottky diode, DO-41 (D3)
1 3mm LED (LED1)
Capacitors
4 470μF 16V PC electrolytic
3 100μF 16V PC electrolytic
1 22μF 16V PC electrolytic
1 2.2μF 16V PC electrolytic
1 1μF 16V PC electrolytic
3 100nF 63/100V MKT polyester
4 47nF 63/100V MKT polyester (with closely matched values; see text)
1 33nF 63/100V MKT polyester
2 1.5nF 63/100V MKT polyester
1 1nF 63/100V MKT polyester
1 15pF NP0/C0G ceramic
Resistors (all ¼W ±1% axial unless noted)
1 100kW
2 30kW
2 4.7kW
2 1kW
1 150W
1 82kW
7 10kW
1 1.5kW
1 620W
2 1W ½W (±5% OK)
Parts for loop antenna
4 20 × 12 × 2400mm dressed all-round timber batten (hardwood for outdoor use)
1 8mm diameter, 1.2m-long timber dowel
1 3.5mm stereo jack line plug
1 3m length of twin-core shielded audio cable
3 0.63mm-diameter, 36m-long enamelled copper wire spools (105m total length)
[Altronics W0406, Jaycar WW4018] OR
2 0.5mm-diameter, 57m-long enamelled copper wire spools (114m total length) •
[Altronics W0405, Jaycar WW4016]
1 50mm length of 1mm diameter heatshrink tubing
1 wire clamp or cable tie (see text)
• will likely result in reduced performance compared to 0.63mm-diameter wire
siliconchip.com.au
Australia's electronics magazine
low-frequency electromagnetic waves,
and IC1 converts the current from
the antenna to a voltage. The signal
is amplified using a low-noise operational amplifier chip (op amp). It also
includes signal roll-off above 22kHz.
This removes signals that could otherwise overload the receiver.
The signal is then sent to a low-pass
filter to further remove signals above
22kHz (as the first filter is not perfect)
before passing through a notch filter.
This notch filter removes the mains
frequency and prevents mains hum
from dominating the received signal.
The notch can be set to attenuate either
50Hz or 60Hz, depending on the local
mains frequency.
Switch S2 selects the signal from
before or after the notch filter. You can
also minimise mains hum by adjusting
the orientation of the loop antenna.
This may not be successful in built-up
areas, where there are sources of mains
radiation in almost every direction.
A further gain stage based on IC3
provides more gain, up to 51 times,
set using VR5. The recording output
signal level can be adjusted with VR6,
while the volume to the headphone
amplifier is adjusted with VR7.
Circuit details
December 2025 65
connected to and powers the circuit.
Diode D3 prevents reverse polarity
connection current flow, while power
is switched via toggle switch S2. LED1
lights via the 1.5kW series resistor
when power is on.
A half-supply rail (around 4.5V with
a 9V battery) is used to bias signals
so that they can swing symmetrically
about this reference before clipping
to the supply rails. This half-supply
rail is derived by two 10kW resistors
across the main supply, with the junction decoupled to ground with a 100μF
capacitor.
Op amp IC2d buffers this half-
supply voltage, and this buffered reference (+4.5Vb) goes to non-inverting
pin 3 of op amp IC1 via a 4.7kW resistor. IC1 is a low-noise op amp that is
used to convert the alternating current
in the loop antenna to a voltage.
The loop antenna is AC-coupled
by a 470μF capacitor at one end to
the non-inverting input of IC1, with
the other end connecting directly to
the inverting input (pin 2). The signal level is set by the 4.7kW feedback
resistance connected between the op
amp output at pin 6 to the inverting
input (pin 2), in conjunction with the
current generated in the loop.
The op amp output level adjusts
so that the inverting input voltage
matches the non-inverting input. The
op amp input offset voltage and input
offset current will affect how close
they are. Both are low due to IC1 being
a precision op amp.
A 1nF capacitor between pins 2 and
3 of IC1 shunts high-frequency noise,
while the 1.5nF capacitor across the
4.7kW feedback resistor provides a
high-frequency roll off at 22.6kHz.
A roll-off is also inherent in the op
amp itself, as it has limited bandwidth
beyond audio frequencies, so is not
capable of providing a signal output
at AM broadcast frequencies. This also
applies, to a lesser extent, to other op
amps used in the circuit.
The OP07 has a typical noise specification of 9.6nV/√Hz. The noise current
specification for this op amp is also
very low, typically below 1.7pA/√Hz.
For this design, having a low noise current is important since we are amplifying the loop antenna current rather
than the voltage, and we don’t want
noise to swamp the signal.
The 470μF capacitor that AC-
couples the antenna loop to IC1 prevents large DC shifts in the op amp output when the loop antenna is moved
or when the loop wires move in wind.
These small antenna movements can
otherwise generate very low-frequency
signal due to movement within the
Earth’s magnetic field; enough to result
in signal clipping unless prevented
by the low-frequency roll-off of the
capacitor.
The output of IC1 is fed to IC2c,
which provides the active part of the
22kHz low-pass filter. It attenuates
signals above 22kHz so that higher-
frequency signals do not swamp the
wanted VLF and ELF waves. The filter is a third-order multiple-feedback
arrangement.
The filter components were chosen to produce a steep roll-off above
22kHz, but this is at the sacrifice of
having a small amount of ripple in the
passband, below 22kHz. This is called
a Chebyshev filter. The ripple in the
design is minimal, though, at a maximum of just ±2dB.
For our design, we obtain an overall 85dB per decade roll-off due from
IC1 and the 22kHz low-pass filter combination. The third-order filter itself
provides a much steeper roll-off compared to a first- or second-order filter.
Designing these filters is made easier using the filter design tools from
siliconchip.au/link/ac8r
Following the low-pass filter is the
active Twin-T filter used to notch out
and severely attenuate the mains frequency, based on IC2a & IC2b. This
can be tuned to 50Hz or 60Hz to match
Fig.7: the full circuit of the Earth Radio, which is laid out similarly to the block diagram (Fig.6). IC1 is a low-noise
precision op amp, IC2 is a quad JFET-input general-purpose op amp and IC3 is a similar dual op amp.
66
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
the mains frequency in your location.
The twin-T comprises two T sections, with one half being VR1, VR2
and the two parallel 47nF capacitors. The other half consists of the
two series-connected 47nF capacitors
and VR3.
The notch frequency in Hz for the
first tee is 1 ÷ (π × [VR1 + VR2] × 47nF).
VR1 and VR2 are set to the same value:
68.1kW for a 50Hz notch, or 56.2kW for
a 60Hz notch. For the second tee, the
frequency is 1 ÷ (4π × VR3 × 47nF), so
VR3 is set to 34kW for the 50Hz notch,
or 28.1kW for 60Hz.
Typical 47nF capacitors are rated at
±5% or even ±10%, so unless you buy
special ±1% (or better) 47nF capacitors, they need to be chosen so that the
values are all within 1% of each other.
More on selecting them later.
If the average is above or below
47nF, VR1, VR2 and VR3 can be
adjusted to set the notch to the correct frequency. The main thing is that
they are all close in value. You can find
the Twin-T filter calculations are at
siliconchip.au/link/ac8s
The depth of the notch filter is
adjustable using VR4. It can set the
notch so that the rejection level is
deep, with VR4 clockwise for a value of
220W. It is less deep with VR4 adjusted
fully anti-clockwise (2kW).
The PCB is relatively
compact but still easy to
assemble.
We provide this
adjustment since it is
easier to adjust the
notch frequency
when the notch
is not too deep.
Once the frequency is set,
increasing the
notch depth will
reduce the 50Hz or 60Hz
hum further. This will also
narrow the notch so that frequencies
on either side of the notch frequency
will be less affected by attenuation.
Switch S1 switches the notch in or
out. In the ‘out’ position, S1 selects
the signal directly from the output of
the 22kHz filter at pin 8 of IC2c. In the
‘in’ position, the signal is selected from
the notch filter output at the output of
IC2a. The frequency response is shown
in Fig.8, giving a high-frequency rolloff at around 85dB/decade, with the
50Hz notch around 80dB down.
More gain
IC3a provides more signal gain,
which is set using VR5. The maximum
gain of 51 times is with VR5 set at its
maximum resistance. The amplifier’s
input signal is already biased at half
supply by its source; the 22μF capacitor coupling the 1kW resistor from
pin 2 to ground charges to the average
DC voltage of pin 3 and adds a low-
frequency roll-off at 7.2Hz.
The output from IC3a is also
AC-coupled to prevent DC current
flowing in VR6 and VR7. This prevents DC voltage shifts when making
adjustments with these potentiometers. VR6 sets the recording level at
the 3.5mm output jack socket, CON2.
VR7 sets the volume of the signal level
Earth Radio Kit (SC7582, $55): includes the PCB and everything that
mounts on it, plus the antenna jack plug. The case, battery, power supply
and antenna parts are not included.
siliconchip.com.au
Australia's electronics magazine
December 2025 67
applied to headphone amplifier IC3b.
The wiper of VR7 is AC-coupled to
IC3b’s non-inverting input and biased
to half supply via a 100kW resistor connecting to IC2d’s output.
The bias voltage from IC2d is additionally low-pass filtered by a 1kW
resistor and 100μF capacitor to prevent oscillation of the overall circuit.
This can occur when the half-supply
reference for the circuit varies with the
signal level. Without the filtering, the
half supply at IC1’s pin 3 input from
the IC2d output could be modulated
by the signal at VR7’s wiper, causing
feedback and oscillation.
IC3b works in conjunction with
buffer transistors Q1 and Q2 to drive
headphones or earphones. The output
of IC3b drives Q2 directly, in emitter-
follower mode, with Q1’s base set
at approximately two diode voltage
drops higher. Diodes D1 and D2 ensure
that both transistors are conducting
some current even with no signal by
applying sufficient bias voltage to their
base-emitter junctions.
There is always a small voltage
across the 1W resistors, which minimises crossover distortion during
the period when output drive current
hands over from one transistor to the
next, as the signal passes the half-rail
voltage. Feedback to the inverting
input of IC3b also minimises distortion by correcting the signal output to
match that of the signal applied to the
non-inverting input.
The presence of the 1W resistors
also stabilises the quiescent current
via local negative feedback.
Current through the bias diodes is
set by 10kW resistors in series with
them from both supply rails. Trimpot
VR8 is included to reduce this bias
current should the total diode voltage be significantly higher than the
sum of the transistor base-to-emitter
voltages. This could otherwise cause
high quiescent current and transistor
overheating.
VR8 is normally set to its maximum
unless the quiescent current of Q1
& Q2 is too high. Adjusting VR8 for
a lower resistance will bypass some
of the diode current and reduce the
resulting forward voltages. This can
be used to account for differences
between different batches of diodes
and transistors.
The output from the headphone
amplifier, at the junction of the two 1W
resistors, is AC-coupled to headphone
socket CON3 using a 470μF capacitor
to remove the half-supply voltage, preventing a direct current flow through
the headphones. Another 470μF capacitor bypasses the power supply.
Several 100nF capacitors and a
470μF capacitor also bypass the supply for the op amps throughout the circuit for stability, providing a low supply source impedance for each device.
Selecting the 47nF capacitors
As previously mentioned, the 47nF
capacitors for the Twin-T filter need to
be selected so their values are within
1% of each other. Typically, if you buy
5% plastic film capacitors on a bandolier (cardboard tape/belt), the adjacent
components will have similar values.
We found that four capacitors of the
same marked value in a row weren’t
within ±1% of the actual 47nF rating,
but whatever value we measured for
the first one, the other three would all
measure within 1% of that.
You may need to get more than four
capacitors so that at least four will be of
a similar value. That’s still a lot cheaper
than purchasing 1% capacitors.
If you have a capacitance meter, the
values can be measured directly. Alternatively, if you have an oscilloscope or
frequency meter, the capacitors can be
tested using a standard astable oscillator made with a 555 or 7555 timer.
The frequency of oscillation is related
to the capacitance.
Fig.9 shows the circuitry required.
Using 10kW for RA and RB, the frequency of oscillation would be around
1023Hz (ie, just over 1kHz) for a 47nF
capacitor.
Note that the oscillator frequency
doesn’t accurately tell us the capacitance value. However, if you select
capacitors that give the same frequency to within 1%, the capacitor
values will be within 1%. This means
you need a spread of less than 10Hz
for the configuration shown.
The easiest method is to measure the
frequency of all four capacitors and
then subtract the lowest reading from
the highest. If the number you get is
no more than 10, you’ve found a set of
capacitors that’s close enough. Otherwise, measure a fifth and then remove
whichever value is the furthest from
the others and repeat until you get a
spread of no more than 10Hz.
Next month
The follow-up article next month
will start with the PCB assembly
instructions for the Earth Radio. After
that, we’ll describe how to build the
loop antenna, then testing the Earth
Radio, followed by some advice on
SC
getting the best out of it.
Fig.8: the frequency response of the Earth Radio, as determined by simulation.
You can see the 50Hz notch and the high-frequency roll-off.
Fig.9: if you don’t have an
accurate capacitance meter, this
simple circuit can be used to check
how close a set of capacitors are in
value, using a frequency meter.
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
68
Silicon Chip
SAVE 15%
Great
for crafts
and hobbies
too!
50
$
T 1463
NEW!
49.95
$
T 2181
SAVE 21%
5 In 1 Plier, Cutter & Crimper
Interchangeable magnetic heads with ultra secure fit for
even the toughest of jobs. Includes pliers, cable cutters, wire
strippers, scissors and connector crimping pliers.
Handheld Magnifier
Ultimate Helping Hands
This space efficient work station for your benchtop
has a sturdy metal base and packs in loads of features,
including 4 flexible clamp arms, solder reel
holder, dry tip cleaner, container of flux AND a
magnifier lamp.
Premium 130mm glass 6x
magnifier with LED lighting.
SAVE 28%
X 0433
12
$
55
$
USB Lithium
Rotary Tool Set
T 2125
Drills, cuts, sharpens, cleans, polishes and
engraves most surfaces, this rotary tool is
ideal for enthusiasts, hobby makers, or just
odd jobs around the house. 5 speeds from
5000 to 25000RPM. USB C recharge with
60 mins operation. 42 accessories included.
Upgrade your Toolkit
T 2758A
SAVE 25%
22
$
S TOCK U P O N TO O LS F O R 2 0 2 6
T 2130
T 1576
SAVE $30
NEW!
99
$
99
$
Plier & Cutter Set
A must have for any electronics enthusiast.
Includes: • Side cutters. • Flat long needle
nose pliers. • Flat bent needle nose pliers.
• Long nose pliers/cutters. • Bull nose
pliers/cutters
T 4018
TOP
VALUE!
Hydraulic Crimping Tool
Designed for both professionals and DIY
enthusiasts, this Hydraulic Crimping Tool
delivers up to 80KN of crimping force,
ensuring secure and efficient lug connections
for power cabling. Accommodates wire sizes
from 4mm² to 70mm² (AWG 11 to 2/0)
SAVE 24%
12
$
All in one electronic screwdriver set.
This Jakemy® electronic screwdriver set is great for device
repairs and other maintenance tasks. Driver offers three-speed
torque options with automatic power save mode. Unique
folding case houses all 180 bits and accessories.
Magnetic Parts Bowl
A handy 4” bowl with magnetic base to keep
screws from straying while you work.
Your electronics supplier since 1976.
Shop in-store at one of our 11 locations around Australia:
WA » PERTH » JOONDALUP » CANNINGTON » MIDLAND » MYAREE » BALCATTA
VIC » SPRINGVALE » AIRPORT WEST QLD » VIRGINIA NSW » AUBURN SA » PROSPECT
Or shop online 24/7 <at> altronics.com.au
Build It Yourself Electronics Centre®
© Altronics 2025. E&OE. Prices stated here in are only valid until 31/12/25 or until stocks run out. Prices include GST and exclude freight and insurance. See latest catalogue for freight rates.
By Tim Blythman
Decoder
Base Station
Using DCC
Remote Controller
DCC Booster
DCC Decoder
for model locomotives
DCC is a great way to control model trains in a realistic fashion. You need a DCC Decoder for every
locomotive and a base station to produce DCC signals on the track. This DCC Decoder project
provides the first essential part. We will follow up with a DCC Base Station project and a guide to
getting started with DCC using these in our next issue. Image source: https://pixabay.com/photos/steam-locomotive-model-series-23-3627896/
F
or many years, model railways were limited to a simple DC system. The two rails
formed conductors that carried
power from a controller directly to the
motor of a model railway locomotive.
The controller would simply provide
a voltage and polarity to control the
loco’s speed and direction. It’s simple
and elegant, but only allows one train
to be operated at a time.
Of course, real railways run more
than one train simultaneously and,
over time, different technologies have
been used to allow this. One wellknown example divides the track into
sections called blocks. A switch panel
routes power between the blocks and
multiple controllers. As you can imagine, this can get very complex.
In the late 1980s, Lenz Elektronik
of Germany developed the early versions of what would later become digital command control or DCC. The US
National Model Railroad Association
(NMRA) took an interest and developed
DCC as a standard under its auspices.
The NMRA had previously worked
on standards relating to matters
such as wheels and trackwork for
model railways, intending to foster
70
Silicon Chip
compatibility and interoperability
between manufacturers. With its promotion as a standard, DCC continues
to be one of the most popular systems
for operating model railways.
The NMRA continues to develop
and publish updates to the DCC standards and these, along with their other
standards are available to download
from siliconchip.au/link/ac7w
We have published several articles
related to DCC, including feature articles and projects for boosters, programmers and even a computer-based base
station. However, this is the first DCC
decoder we have published, which
means that all you need to build a complete DCC system can now be found
within Silicon Chip.
The Complete Arduino DCC Controller can round out a working system (January 2020; siliconchip.au/
Article/12220), but it relies on a computer, so might be excessive for readers looking for a straightforward starter
system. Thus, we have also designed
a standalone Base Station based on a
Raspberry Pi Pico 2 microcontroller
and touch panel LCD, which we will
introduce next month.
Australia's electronics magazine
That unit can control up to five
locomotives when paired with a suitable power supply, and can also perform decoder programming; more
than enough for most small layouts.
If you are not familiar with DCC terminology, refer to our glossary later
in this article.
DCC operation
The Arduino-based DCC Programmer from October 2018 (siliconchip.
au/Article/11261) included a panel on
how DCC works. Fig.1 is a comparison
between so-called DC operation (using
a controller providing an analog DC
voltage) and DCC operation. Fig.1(a)
shows DC operation.
This project deals with the decoder
shown in Fig.1(b). Its main role is
receiving power and data as a varying
voltage sent from the DCC base station, and decoding the data to drive
the motor and function outputs. The
latter might be incandescent globes or
LEDs. Note that the motor and lights
are not part of this project; they will
be part of the locomotive to which you
are adding the Decoder!
Our Decoder and Base Station can
siliconchip.com.au
Features & Specifications
🛤 Suitable for N and HO/OO scales
🛤 Has support for a keep-alive
capacitor
🛤 Long, short and consist addressing
🛤 Acceleration control and speed
curve adjustment
🛤 Configurable lighting outputs and
flashing effects
🛤 Voltage compensation option
🛤 Supports operations, paged,
physical and direct programming
modes
🛤 Supports 14-step, 28-step and
128-step speed control
🛤 Robust design with current
limiting on all outputs
Fig.1: (a) shows the typical wiring
inside a DC-only (non-DCC)
locomotive, while (b) shows how
this changes when a DCC decoder
is fitted. If two locomotives were
on the track in (a), their motors would run together. The decoder allows the
lights and motors in the two locomotives to run independently. The vertical red
lines show where wires need to be cut to install the Decoder.
be the electronic basis of an economical but complete DCC system. The
Decoder design is robust, with current
limiting provided for both the motor
and function outputs.
Commercial DCC decoders include
a multitude of features, including
sampled and synthesised sounds and
complex lighting effects. Our Decoder
provides some basic lighting effects
and is an inexpensive option if you
assemble it yourself.
We’ve also designed the Decoder
with the idea that our readers might
want to extend or modify it by adding
circuitry. Thus, the Decoder provides
connections for rectified DC from the
track as well as regulated 3.3V, something not commonly seen on commercial decoders.
Alternatives
These days, RF (radio frequency)
controls have become more accessible
and microcontrollers more powerful.
We have published a few projects relating to RF control of model railways,
including Les Kerr’s Battery-Powered
Model Train from the January 2025
issue (siliconchip.au/Article/17607).
siliconchip.com.au
We have also seen systems based
on WiFi. These typically use low-cost
ESP8266 or ESP32 WiFi processor
modules. Still, we are yet to see uniform standards for these sorts of systems, so you will likely be committed
to building all the parts yourself if you
choose one of these options.
Our DCC Decoder and Base Station
have both been designed according to
the DCC standards, and tested with
their commercial counterparts. So they
can be used as part of an existing DCC
system, or further expanded in the
future with other products.
The Decoder
A locomotive decoder (also known
as a mobile decoder) is intended to be
used with a model railway locomotive
or perhaps a motorised railcar. It could
be fitted into the tender behind a steam
locomotive, if there is space, or if that
is where the motor is installed.
🛤 Size: 28 × 14 × 4mm
🛤 Input voltage: up to 17V peak
🛤 Motor current: up to 500mA
🛤 Function outputs: four, up to
100mA each
There are other types of decoders,
such as accessory decoders, that can
operate line-side equipment, such as
points motors and signal lights. An
accessory decoder could even control
lights or other effects in model buildings and such.
A function-only decoder is another
type of decoder that does not drive
a motor, but can operate lights or
other effects. A typical use would be
for internal or marker lights in a carriage, or perhaps to control a smoke
generator in a guard’s van to emulate
a wood stove.
Since a locomotive decoder can also
control these functions, there is no reason our Decoder cannot be used as a
This tiny DCC Decoder board can be
fitted to a model railway locomotive,
allowing it to be controlled by a DCC
Base station. It’s only 14mm wide
(shown here at twice actual size), so is
suitable for HO/OO and N scale models.
Australia's electronics magazine
December 2025 71
function-only decoder in other rolling
stock. Still, we expect that many readers new to DCC will be most interested
in adding the Decoder to their locomotives as a starting point.
As a rough guide to getting started,
you will need a locomotive decoder
for each locomotive or other item of
motorised rolling stock, plus a base
station to coordinate them all. This
article will present the Decoder design;
for those who already operate a DCC
system, we’ll provide a wiring guide
and some information about its operating parameters; particularly its configuration variables (CVs).
This information should be enough
to allow our Decoders to be customised and integrated into an existing
DCC layout. For those new to DCC,
we’ll provide a more complete user
guide alongside the DCC Base Station
in the next article.
Circuit
Fig.2 shows the circuit of our
four-function DCC mobile Decoder.
Some of the connections are marked
with colours; these correspond to
the wire colours used by the DCC
standards. Each connector on the
Decoder is just a PCB solder pad. With
space at a premium, the expectation is
that wires are soldered directly to the
Decoder PCB.
The DCC track signal is an AC square
wave of about 12V-15V in amplitude
(24V-30V peak-to-peak) with its frequency varying around 6kHz. The
actual voltage is not too important,
although our design limits it to about
7V minimum and 17V maximum.
Just over 12V is typical, since this is
the nominal operating voltage of the
motors in many locomotives.
The track connections to the
Decoder (red and black) feed into
bridge rectifier BR1 and then REG1,
an MCP1703 3.3V LDO (low-dropout)
regulator, providing our nominal 12V
and 3.3V rails. The MCP1703 has a
maximum operating input voltage of
16V; our 17V maximum track voltage
is due to this, with a drop of at least
1V due to the bridge rectifier.
Note that some DCC systems operate at up to 22V peak, so you should
check this before using our Decoder
with an existing system. Some systems
can provide a wide range of supply
voltages, so it may be possible to simply reduce it.
The 3.3V rail powers IC1, a
PIC16F18126 microcontroller, at its
pins 1 and 14. This is the 14-pin sibling of the 20-pin PIC16F18146 micro
we have used in numerous other
projects. The firmware we have created will work in a PIC16F18124 or
PIC16F18125 (with less memory), but
we will supply the PIC16F18126 parts
in the kit as it’s only slightly more
expensive.
The three capacitors provide the
necessary bypassing for the regulator
and microcontroller, while a pair of
100kW resistors connect pins 10 and
11 of the micro to the track connections. The 100kW resistors limit current flowing into the pins, and allow
the micro to safely detect the polarity
of the higher track voltage and thus
receive the DCC signals.
An 11:1 divider (10kW/1kW) on the
12V rail connects to pin 9 on IC1,
allowing the voltage on this rail to be
measured by the 3.3V micro.
IC2 is a DRV8231 3A full-bridge
motor driver IC, powered at its pins
1 and 5 from the 12V rail. Digital
Fig.2: despite its simple design, the Decoder includes current limiting on its motor and function outputs. The 100W resistor
provides charging current for an external capacitor that can feed power back to the circuit via D1, allowing the Decoder
to continue operating through brief contact losses, as might occur with dirty track.
72
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
signals from IC1 (pins 5 and 6) feed
control pins 2 and 3 on IC2. Pins 6
and 8 are the outputs, which are connected directly to the motor pads
on the PCB (orange and grey); it is
expected that a brushed DC motor is
connected here.
IC2 sets our lower voltage operating limit. At about 4.5V, it disables
its motor outputs, so we can guarantee operation down to 7V as required
by the DCC standards. In practice, we
expect that everything will work down
to about 6V on the track.
The 3.3V rail also connects to pin 4
of IC2 (Vref). This is used by the circuitry inside IC2 to provide a current-
limiting feature. The motor current
flows to ground via pin 7, so a 0.68W
current measuring resistor (shunt)
between pin 7 and ground develops
a voltage proportional to the motor
current.
An amplifier internal to IC1 multiplies this by 10 and compares it to the
Vref voltage. If Vref has been exceeded,
the power to the motors is shut off
briefly to limit the current.
A current of 485mA develops 0.33V,
sufficient to trip the current-limiting
circuitry, hence the nominal 500mA
motor current limit specification,
which is well within the limits of this
chip. The DRV8231 can also detect
short circuits and, to limit damage,
it provides a longer shut-off time in
that case.
The circuitry around N-channel
Mosfets Q1-Q4 is for the function
outputs. Q1-Q4 are in an open-drain
configuration for switching 12V loads under the control of a 3.3V microcontroller.
The 10kW gate pull-down resistors
ensure that the Mosfets are switched
off any time the micro is not driving
the control signals from its pins 2,
3, 7 and 8.
A typical load would be a light of
some sort, such as a string of LEDs and
their dropping resistors, or a small
‘grain of wheat’ incandescent globe,
connected between the 12V pad (blue)
and the function output (white, yellow, green or purple).
The 10W resistor between each Mosfet source and ground provides the
current-limiting feature. The 2N7002
Mosfets require a source-to-gate voltage of about 2.3V to fully switch on,
so if more than 100mA flows through
one of the 10W resistors, there is no
longer sufficient voltage (out of the
3.3V logic level signals) to turn on
the Mosfet, and the current is limited
to this level.
The Mosfet will not handle a short
circuit to 12V indefinitely, even with
current limiting, but will survive longer than if it were exposed to a direct
short circuit. With four 100mA outputs, a 500mA motor plus some tens
of milliamperes consumed by the
microcontroller, the Decoder is also
kept under the 1A limit of BR1.
The remaining circuitry is a so-called
keep-alive that allows another larger
capacitor to be connected, so that
the Decoder can operate over dirty
track or in other cases of intermittent
This Decoder
is fitted with a
full complement of the
wires that have colours set
out in the DCC standards. There
is also a small capacitor fitted to the
keep-alive connections.
DCC power. The capacitor is charged
via the 100W resistor, limiting the
peak charging current. The power is
returned to the circuit when needed
via D1, a schottky diode.
We haven’t specified a capacitor
here, since the circuit is fully functional without it. If needed, the capacitor can be chosen based on the space
available in the locomotive. It is completely optional and unnecessary in
most cases. This is also a handy location to pick off 12V if needed for other
circuitry.
The pins needed for in-circuit
serial programming (1, 4, 12, 13 and
14) are connected to the ICSP header
pads, with the standard 10kW pullup
resistors between pins 4 (MCLR) and
1 (Vdd); pin 14 is ground. The 3.3V
power and ground connections on the
ICSP header can also be used to power
other circuitry if required. Connection
diagrams Figs. 3 & 4 show these locations on the PCB.
Firmware operation
1 double-sided 14 × 23mm PCB coded 09111241, 0.8mm thick
1 PIC16F18126-I/SL 8-bit microcontroller programmed with 0911124A.HEX,
SOIC-14 (IC1)
1 DRV8231DDAR motor driver IC, SOIC-8 (IC2)
1 MCP1703A-3302 3.3V SOT-23 LDO regulator (REG1)
4 2N7002 SOT-23 N-channel Mosfets (Q1-Q4)
1 1A SMD bridge rectifier BR1 [MBS4 or CD-MMBL110S]
1 1N5819WS SOD-323 schottky diode (D1)
1 3cm length of 20mm diameter heatshrink tubing
Capacitors (all SMD M2012/0805 size MLCC)
2 10μF 25V X5R
1 100nF 50V X7R
Resistors (all SMD 1%, M2012/0805 size, ⅛W unless noted)
2 100kW
6 10kW
1 1kW
1 100W
The DCC Decoder
4 10W
shown at actual size.
1 0.68W ¼W
The main role of decoding the
incoming DCC signal is performed by
an interrupt service routine (ISR) that
is triggered every 22μs. DCC uses pulse
widths of 58μs (nominal) to encode a
binary ‘1’ bit, with widths over 100μs
encoding a ‘0’ bit. By counting the
time between DCC polarity changes,
the bits can be decoded.
The Decoder then assembles the bits
into packets, looking for a long string
of 1s (‘preamble’) as the start marker.
Since each byte is preceded by a zero
bit, the firmware can easily determine
its position within a packet.
Each packet also includes a checksum; if this doesn’t match what the
Decoder calculates, the packet is
rejected as the data has been corrupted.
Finally, the packet address (encoded
as the first one or two bytes) is used
to determine how the packet should
be treated.
siliconchip.com.au
Australia's
electronics
magazine
DCC Decoder Kit (SC7524, $25): includes
everything
in the parts
list
December 2025 73
Parts List – DCC Decoder
DCC Glossary
Accessory Decoder: A DCC decoder that is designed to be used in a fixed location; for
example, to control points or signals, or fixed lights like streetlights. They operate within a
separate address space to the decoders used in locomotives.
Analog: Describes the traditional mode of model railway operation, where a voltage is applied
to the track that directly drives the locomotive’s motor via wheel pickups. The analog
controller sets the voltage and polarity to determine the speed and direction.
Base Station: A device that drives tracks with a DCC signal and has the means to accept user
input to control the decoders. Many also incorporate programming features as well.
Booster: A device that can drive tracks with a DCC signal but has no user input. It might take
its signal from a separate Base Station or other system. A booster is often used to increase
the amount of power that can be delivered to the track.
Consist: In full-scale railway parlance, a consist is a grouping of rolling stock that operates
together and might include locomotives, passenger cars and freight cars. In DCC, it describes
a grouping of mobile decoders with a common consist address, allowing them to be operated
as though they were a single unit.
CV (Configuration Variable): A non-volatile variable (typically stored in EEPROM) that
determines a decoder’s operating behaviour. This includes the address (fleet number) that it
responds to and how its motors and functions react to user input.
DC: See Analog.
Decoder: A device that receives power and data from a DCC signal and drives lights, motors
etc. Mobile decoders can be fitted to rolling stock, while accessory decoders can control
trackside equipment.
Keep-Alive: A means of providing power to a mobile decoder if the track contact is poor
or intermittent. It usually consists of a capacitor and some circuitry to keep the capacitor
charged, feeding power back to the decoder as needed.
Locomotive: For DCC, this typically includes any item of rolling stock that is fitted with a
motor and mobile decoder, including passenger railcars and motorised tenders.
Long Address: A 14-bit address with valid values from 0 to 10239. This range includes all
four-digit numbers.
Mobile Decoder or Multifunction Decoder: Also known as a locomotive decoder, it is a
decoder designed to operate the motor and lights of a mobile item of rolling stock, such as a
locomotive, although it could be fitted to a passenger railcar or other powered unit.
Operations Mode: A form of CV programming that can occur on an operating track. The
programming packets are addressed and can target a specific decoder. This is the only form
of programming that can occur while the locomotive is active.
Programmer: A device that can perform CV programming. This might include a Base
Station that includes programming features or a standalone device like our Arduino-based
Programmer from October 2018 (siliconchip.au/Article/11261).
Service Mode: Address-only, Physical, Paged and Direct modes do not program decoders by
address, so they must occur on a segregated track in service mode to ensure that only the
target decoder receives the programming commands.
Short Address: A 7-bit address in CV1. It is the only CV that is mandatory. Addresses up
to 127 are valid, but values above 111 conflict with the addresses used for service mode
programming packets and are best avoided.
As well as commands addressed
to specific locomotives, there could
also be broadcast packets on address
0. These allow all trains to be stopped
quickly. Some packets are used to program configuration variables.
The 22μs timer is also divided down
into 7ms intervals to manage the acceleration and deceleration of the motor.
This is a feature of DCC that allows the
locomotive speed to be ramped up or
down at a rate to simulate inertia.
A separate 4Hz timer is used to
allow the function outputs to be modulated in various flashing patterns. An
74
Silicon Chip
eight-bit CV is used to set whether
or not a function output should be
switched on, so flash rates from ½Hz
to 2Hz are possible, as well as other
sequences.
Using these timers, the Decoder also
monitors how long it has been since it
has received a valid packet addressed
to it. This can be used to stop the loco if
a packet has not been received within
a certain period.
If the firmware sees a correctly
addressed packet, it is decoded and
the internal state is updated. This
could involve changing the speed or
Australia's electronics magazine
direction, or switching some of the
function outputs on or off.
IC1’s internal analog-to-digital converter is used to measure the voltage
on the 12V rail. This can be used to
compensate the motor and function
outputs, to even out variations on the
12V rail. This can happen with dirty
track or if the Decoder needs to source
current from the keep-alive capacitor.
The motor driver is provided with
a PWM (pulse-width modulated) signal to vary the motor speed. This raw
speed value received is altered by the
acceleration, deceleration and compensation features and can also be
adjusted by means of CVs that can
be used to alter the speed mapping
profile.
There are also CVs that can be used
to remap the function commands
(as received in the DCC packets) to
specific function outputs, so this is
another processing step that occurs,
as well as applying any flashing patterns that have been set.
CV programming
CV programming involves modifying the configuration variables (CVs) to
change the Decoder’s behaviour. The
CVs are kept in non-volatile EEPROM,
so are not lost during a power cycle.
The list of CVs supported by our
Decoder is shown in Table 1. These
operate as described in the DCC standards, except for those set aside for
manufacturer-specific features.
For example, CV1 is used to hold a
7-bit value that is known as the short
address. Thus, changing CV1 allows
the Decoder to respond to a different address. This is key to how DCC
allows multiple locomotives to operate on the same tracks. Typically, the
address will correspond to the fleet
number painted on the locomotive or
item of rolling stock.
The firmware also looks for the specific sequences needed for CV programming and updates the EEPROM
and all live operating parameters.
Since CV programming can make
permanent changes, extra checks are
made to validate these commands.
One check that is performed (and
required by the standard) is to only
make changes when two consecutive,
identical packets are received.
There are several different programming modes, but our Decoder fully
supports Address-only, Physical,
Paged and Direct modes. These fall
siliconchip.com.au
Table 1: configuration variables supported
CV
Notes
Default
1
A 7-bit value for the short address (the eighth bit is ignored). Values above 99 are not recommended because some
of them conflict with the addresses used for service mode programming. Many systems restrict this to the range 0-99
and use the long address (CV17 and CV18) for all 3- and 4-digit addresses. The default address of 3 is standard.
3
2
Start voltage. This value (as a fraction of 255) dictates the proportion of voltage that is applied at the lowest speed
setting.
0
3
Acceleration. A value of 0 means acceleration is disabled (the speed is updated instantly). Different systems are in
use, but this Decoder applies a speed step every (7ms × value of CV3). Higher values mean slower acceleration, so a
setting of 3 will result in one speed step every 21ms.
0
4
Deceleration. Works the same as Acceleration, but allows a different rate to be applied for deceleration.
0
5
High voltage. This value (as a fraction of 255) dictates the proportion of voltage that is applied at the highest speed
setting. If it is 0 or 1, it is treated the same as 255, ie, full voltage.
0
6
Mid voltage. This value (as a fraction of 255) dictates the proportion of voltage that is applied at the middle speed
setting. If it is 0 or 1, it is ignored (only the start and high voltages are used in calculations).
0
7
Manufacturer version number (read only).
0x5C (‘SC’)
8
Manufacturer identification number (read only). The value of 13 has been allocated by the NMRA for the identification
of DIY decoders.
13
11
Packet timeout. This value dictates how many seconds a decoder will maintain speed without receiving a validly
addressed packet. When set to 0, the decoder will not time out and will continue to maintain speed.
0
17
Most significant bits of the long address. The long address is nominally 14 bits and the top two bits of CV17 are set.
The range of valid values for CV17 is restricted to 192-231, allowing the meaningful bits to represent the values 0-39.
This gives an address range from 0-10239, which includes all four-digit decimal numbers.
192
18
The least significant bits of the long address.
0
19
Consist address and direction. Consisting allows multiple locomotives to be allocated to a train under the control
of a single address, the consist address. The lower seven bits form a short address that can be used for consist
addressing. When these seven bits are set to 0, consist mode is off; otherwise, the Decoder will respond to its consist
address instead of its short or long address. When the upper bit is set, the locomotive operates in the opposite of its
normal direction (eg, for running back-to-back with another locomotive).
0
29
Basic configuration. The bits in this CV each correspond to a basic configuration setting. Our Decoder implements:
Bit 0: When set, the locomotive reverses its direction of travel.
Bit 1: When set, the Decoder interprets baseline speed packets as 28-step; when clear, as 14-step. The Decoder will
also respond to 128-step packets at all times.
Bit 5: When set, the Decoder responds to its long address; otherwise, it uses its short address.
2
The default values for CVs 33-37 are 1, 2, 4, 8 and 0 respectively, meaning the functions are mapped across each row. It is possible to
configure multiple commands to control a single output or for a command to control multiple outputs.
33
Headlight forward command → F0F output (RA5)
1
34
Headlight reverse command → F0R output (RA4)
2
35
F1 command
→ F1 output (RC3)
4
36
F2 command
→ F2 output (RC2)
8
37
F3 command
→ Mapped to none
0
CVs in the range 47-64 are free for custom use by designers. We have implemented them as follows.
47
Voltage compensation. When enabled, the Decoder adjusts the PWM duty cycle to counteract changes in the supply
voltage.
Bits 0-3 (values 1-15): when set, the Decoder sets the function outputs to match the voltage to the setting. For
example, if the Decoder’s supply voltage (measured at the bridge output) is 14V and bits 0-3 are set to 7 (0111),
then the functions will be driven with a 50% duty cycle output.
Bit 4: when set, the decoder compensates the motor PWM to make the full speed value correspond to 16V.
When either value is set to 0, the corresponding compensation is disabled.
0
For CVs 49-52 each bit corresponds to a time slice of ¼ second over a two-second period, with the MSB occurring first.
A set bit means the function output is on and thus different values will give different flash patterns. Where two different
values are provided, they will operate out of phase. All values 0-255 are valid, see the right-hand column for what some
example values will output.
255: solid on
85 or 170: 2Hz
51 or 204: 1Hz
15 or 240: ½Hz
49
F0F output (RA5) → Flash pattern
255
50
F0R output (RA4) → Flash pattern
255
51
F1 output (RC3)
→ Flash pattern
siliconchip.com.au
52 F2 output (RC2) → Flash pattern
Australia's electronics magazine
255
December
255 2025 75
Figs.3 & 4: there is little room on the PCB for silkscreen markings, so you
will have to pay close attention to these overlay diagrams, shown at ~400%
scale. The Decoder will typically be wired into a locomotive as shown here.
If using lamps, the polarity doesn’t matter & series resistors are not needed.
into the category of what is known as
service mode programming.
These modes do not use the Decoder
address, so are typically done on a segregated programming track to target
a single Decoder. They would most
often be used during initial setup of
the locomotive after the Decoder is
installed, before it is placed on the
mainline track.
Our Decoder also supports the long
form of operations mode programming, which is intended to be used on
a mainline track. It thus includes an
address parameter, to ensure that the
commands are directed to the correct
decoder amongst the many that might
be on the main track.
This mode could be used to tweak
76
Silicon Chip
the speed or acceleration profile and
then perform testing without having
to shuffle the locomotive to and from
the programming track. As such, this
mode does not permit changes to critical CVs like addresses.
Decoder assembly
The Decoder is built on a double-
sided PCB coded 09111241 that measures just 14 × 23mm. It has been
deliberately kept as small as possible,
to fit in tight spaces (it’s even thinner than a normal PCB at 0.8mm), so
there isn’t much room for designators
on the silkscreen. You will have to
closely follow the overlay diagrams
(Figs.3 & 4) to ensure all parts are fitted correctly.
Australia's electronics magazine
The passive components are all
M2012/0805 size (2.0 × 1.2mm), while
the rest are in SOT-23 or SOIC packages. None are too difficult to solder,
but it would be ideal for prospective
constructors to have some SMD experience.
We recommend that you have on
hand flux paste (ideally in a syringe),
solder-wicking braid, a magnifier, finetipped tweezers and the usual SMD
gear. We found it easier to start assembly with the top side of the PCB; this
has the track and motor connections
(M and T) and the SOIC-8 chip, IC2.
A PCB holder or some Blu-Tack will
be handy to secure the board and prevent it from moving around.
IC2 has an exposed pad on its underside. We have placed a large hole under
that pad so that you can flow solder
through from the other side, or melt
solder paste via that hole.
To ensure that solder will flow
through this hole from the other side
of the board, add plenty of flux paste
to the pad under the IC and inside
that hole. That should help to draw
solder through from the other side of
the board.
Solder this first so that you can
check that this joint is secure before
starting on any other pins. This could
also be soldered with a reflow oven, if
you have one. We secured the chip flat
against the PCB with polyimide (Kapton) tape and then flipped the board
over to feed solder through the pad
hole on the other side.
Flow solder into the hole and apply
heat for a few seconds. If the chip is
properly soldered, after removing the
tape, the chip remains in place. Then
solder the remaining leads. After that,
fit REG1 as shown. The single diode,
D1, has its cathode towards the bridge
rectifier and track connections.
The two capacitors on this side
are both 10μF parts. Once they are
in place, solder the bridge rectifier,
being sure to orientate it correctly.
Follow with Q4 and the resistors on
this side, being careful to match their
values. Flip the PCB over and solder
Mosfets Q1-Q3 and IC1. Note that both
ICs have their pin 1s towards the centre of the PCB.
The sole 100nF capacitor is in one
corner of the PCB. The seven remaining resistors can then be fitted. Clean
off the excess flux with an appropriate solvent and allow the PCB to dry,
inspect it carefully and rectify any
siliconchip.com.au
We have wired up this compact N-scale motorised chassis (Kato 11-107) using our Decoder, allowing us to run tests on a
short length of track. We removed two folded metal strips from inside the chassis to break the electrical connection between
the track pickups and the motor. For clarity, we have left off the heatshrink, but we recommend you fit it to prevent short
circuits. For views inside the mechanism, see www.hookstonemodels.co.uk/dcc-conversion/kato/11-107-chassis
solder bridges or dry joints before powering up the Decoder.
Programming IC1
If you have purchased a kit or programmed IC, IC1 will be programmed
and programming will not be needed.
Otherwise, you can use a Snap, PICkit
BASIC, PICkit 4 or PICkit 5 to program the 0911124A.HEX file onto
the chip.
We were able to program one of
our prototypes by fitting a 5-way pin
header strip to a PICkit 5’s header
socket and then pressing that against
the Decoder’s ICSP header pads. We
used the PICkit 5 to provide 3V power.
If that doesn’t work, then you may
need to temporarily solder a header
strip to the Decoder’s ICSP header
pads. The pad spacings are slightly
narrower than 0.1in (2.54mm), but a
standard 0.1in header can be made to
fit without too much trouble.
Testing
If you would like to run some tests
on the Decoder, you can apply power
from a 9V battery to the ‘T’ pads that
feed into the bridge rectifier. Because
of the bridge, the polarity does not
matter.
This should power up the Decoder
and you should see about 7.5V across
the keep-alive pads. The output of the
3.3V regulator should be available on
pins 2 and 3 of the ICSP header. You
can see these connections in Figs. 3
& 4. If these voltages are present and
nothing is getting hot, all is as well as
can be expected.
Connections
The connections to the Decoder are
shown in Figs.3 & 4, with the wire
colours chosen to match those set
out in the DCC standards. The other
siliconchip.com.au
connections are not part of the standard, but could be useful. If you have
previously installed a decoder in a
locomotive, these colours should be
familiar.
There is a lot of detail in fitting a
Decoder to a locomotive. We can only
provide some general advice, but anyone with a reasonable understanding
of electronics should be able to figure it out.
It’s a good idea to check the voltage
and current demands of the locomotive and any additions before making
any changes. We expect that LEDs
and most small, modern motors will
satisfy the requirements, but incandescent globes and older motors may
draw more current than the Decoder
can provide.
One of the most important things
is to ensure that all existing connections between the wheel pickups (to
the track) and the motor or lights are
broken. An existing connection may
conflict with a connection made by
the Decoder, causing a short circuit.
In Fig.1(a), the red lines show the
wires that might typically need to be
cut; note that the diodes will probably be discarded in this case, as the
Decoder provides rectified DC to the
function outputs. Check the polarity
of any LEDs carefully as well, since
they may need to be reversed.
In practice, the red and black (track)
wires will go to the wheel pickups
on the locomotive. They are effectively interchangeable, but the standards specify that the red wire should
connect to the right-hand rail when
the locomotive is travelling in the forward direction.
The grey and orange wires go to
the motor and, again, they are interchangeable in practice. The standards
say that it should be wired up so that
the locomotive moves forward when
the orange wire has the more positive
voltage.
We suggest you connect these wires
in whatever way is easiest. If it turns
out that the locomotive drives the
wrong way, that can be fixed by simply changing a configuration variable.
The blue wire effectively provides
a positive supply, with the various
function outputs connecting to negative when active. Thus, LEDs should
have their anodes connected to the
blue wire; common-anode LEDs are
typical. There is usually enough voltage to allow two or maybe three LEDs
to be connected in series with a single
ballast resistor.
The default configuration makes the
white wire active when the locomotive is going forward and the yellow
Fig.5: wire up a Pico 2 and a 9V
battery like this to use the Arduino
sketch to test the Decoder. The
resistors are simply provided for protection against
damage to the Pico 2 or a connected computer. You
should also connect some lights or a motor as per
this diagram to see the outputs working.
Australia's electronics magazine
December 2025 77
Silicon
Chip
PDFs on USB
wire active when the locomotive is in
reverse. Again, it might make sense to
use whatever wire is convenient and
change the function mapping using
the configuration variables.
Remember to thread heatshrink tubing over the wires before soldering
them, then shrink it into place once
everything is tested and operational
to prevent accidental short circuits.
If you don’t plan on wiring an
external capacitor to the keep-alive
pads, you might be able to fit another
surface-
mounting capacitor (similar
to the 10μF parts already on the PCB)
directly across these pads. That will
give the Decoder a small extra power
reserve.
Arduino test sketch
The USB also comes
with its own case
¯ A treasure trove of Silicon Chip magazines on a 32GB
custom-made USB.
¯ Each USB is filled with a set of issues as PDFs – fully
searchable and with a separate index – you just need a PDF
viewer.
¯ Ordering the USB also provides you with download access
for the relevant PDFs, once your order has been processed
¯ 10% off your order (not including postage cost) if you are
currently subscribed to the magazine.
Receive an extra discount If
you already own digital copies
of the magazine (in the block
you are ordering).
Conclusion
THE FIRST SIX BLOCKS COST $100 OR PAY $650 FOR ALL SEVEN (+ POST)
NOVEMBER 1987 – DECEMBER 1994
JANUARY 2005 – DECEMBER 2009
JANUARY 1995 – DECEMBER 1999
JANUARY 2010 – DECEMBER 2014
JANUARY 2000 – DECEMBER 2004
JANUARY 2015 – DECEMBER 2019
OUR NEWEST BLOCK COSTS $150
→
JANUARY 2020 – DECEMBER 2024
WWW.SILICONCHIP.COM.AU/SHOP/DIGITAL_PDFS
78
Silicon Chip
We are providing an Arduino test
sketch (DCC_ADD3_TEST) that can
be used if you have a locomotive (or
motors and lamps) and Decoder, but
not a base station. It is written for a
Pico or Pico 2 using the arduino-pico
board profile. It is based on the code
we have developed for the upcoming
Base Station.
The sketch produces a logic-level
DCC signal between GP0 & GP1 pins
and expects power to be provided by
other means. We can use the keep-alive
connections for this purpose; something like a 9V battery would work and
provide a limited current. Note that the
polarity is important when connecting
to the keep-alive pads.
Fig.5 shows the wiring needed to
run a test with the Arduino sketch.
You will also need to connect a motor
or lights to see any effect. The sketch
produces commands with the default
address of 3, and drives the motor outputs in both the forwards and reverse
directions. The function outputs are
activated in turn, with the actions
shown on the serial monitor.
Australia's electronics magazine
Readers who already have a DCC
system will quickly integrate DCC
Decoders into their layout and have
their own ideas about how to set
them up.
A DCC Decoder is not much fun
on its own, so we will be following
up with the DCC Base Station next
month. We will also provide more
background with a feature article for
getting started with DCC in case you
have not worked with a DCC system
SC
before.
siliconchip.com.au
CIRCUIT NOTEBOOK
Interesting circuit ideas which we have checked but not built and tested. Contributions will be paid for at
standard rates. All submissions should include full name, address & phone number.
Pulse-Counting Logic Probe
This Probe was designed for debugging vintage computers. It’s useful
for systems such as the PET’s character address generation (CAG) system,
which has lines that carry numerous,
short pulses.
Due to the very narrow pulses, there
is a chance you could miss one when
probing the line with an oscilloscope,
and it’s also quite annoying having to
count many pulses. I assembled it on
protoboard, as shown in the photo. The
TIL311 hexadecimal LED displays are
siliconchip.com.au
readily available on eBay, for around
$7-20 each from China.
The probe simply consists of two
binary counters (74HCT161) that are
clocked by the pulse chains being
probed. The counting is gated; in the
PET, this is typically done using either
the HORZ DISP ON pulse or the VIDEO
ON pulse. However, the probe can be
gated by many other signals in other
systems.
When the PET’s circuitry is functioning normally, a specific number
Australia's electronics magazine
of pulses appear in specific time windows throughout the circuitry. So this
probe is very handy for checking that
everything is working properly.
A simple gated logic probe counts
pulses during the gate window. At the
end of the count, the data is latched
in the displays, then shortly after, the
counter ICs are cleared. The display
is blanked during the counting time,
so the visible display appears clean
and stable.
With two single-digit hex displays,
the count can range from 0 to 255,
presented as a hexadecimal value
from 00 to FF. That ‘byte’ can be readily converted into a decimal value if
required. Decimal counter ICs such as
the 74HCT160 could be used, but that
would limit the count to 99, unless
another counter IC and display module were added.
Since the probe could be misused
by accidentally powering it in reverse
or by applying excessive voltages,
some protections are provided. If an
excessive power supply voltage is
applied (say, connecting it to 12V by
mistake) or it is applied with reverse
polarity, the power zener diode (ZD1)
conducts.
There is a sacrificial 1/8W 1W resistor
that will vaporise and behave as a fuse
in that case. It pays to mount that resistor a little clear of the PCB. It drops
only around 100-150mV, depending
on the display brightness.
Diodes D1 and D2 and the resistors
across them allow selective delays of
leading or trailing pulse edges. This is
because the outputs of the 74HCT132
gates have a low resistance and can
charge or discharge the small added
capacitances quickly via the diodes,
but the charge or discharge pathway
is slowed down with the resistors to
create specific delays.
In this case, 500ns and 150ns delays
are provided to allow the counter to
pick up (count) a pulse at the end of
the GATE time, and to latch the count
shortly before the counters are cleared
for the next pulse counting cycle.
The probe has two optional inputs,
GATE and GATE, depending on the
December 2025 79
polarity of the pulses available to
use as the gate pulse. For example, to
count pulses at the probe tip while the
VIDEO ON signal is LOW, the GATE
input would be used. Alternatively, to
count pulses while the gating signal is
high, such as for the HORZ DISP ON
pulse, the GATE input would be used.
Because the displays are blanked
during counting, they do not run at full
brightness. The brightness depends
on the duty cycle of the GATE/GATE
pulses. Even with a 5-10% duty cycle,
the LEDs in these modules are easy
to see.
This photograph shows me using it
to probe a PET computer for debugging purposes. For more detail on how
this probe is used in computer repairs,
see: https://worldphaco.com/uploads/
PETREPAIR1.pdf
Dr Hugo Holden,
Buddina, Qld. ($120)
10A ammeter using a low-cost digital DVM (digital voltmeter)
Digital LED voltmeters capable of
reading up to around 33V are available
on sites like AliExpress and eBay for
just a few dollars. For example, I found
a 5-digit voltmeter available in various LED colours that obviously autoranges around 4.3V, and fairly seamlessly as well. They are advertised as
being suitable for automotive use.
I acquired one and checked its accuracy with my trusty Fluke 87V on
the high DC accuracy setting. I was
astounded by the accuracy of this
unit – the DC voltage matched the
Fluke 87V almost digit for digit from
30V down to 0.0001V! I decided this
80
Silicon Chip
voltmeter could be the basis for a simple but accurate 10A DC ammeter, to
be powered by a stable 12V DC source.
One bonus feature I wanted to incorporate was a voltage output that’s proportional to the monitored current.
The circuit supply input voltage
should be a regulated 12V DC supply, maximum 13V. The power section is connected through CON2 to a
7805 5V linear regulator. Its 5V output
is directed to an ICL7660 switched-
capacitor voltage inverter, producing
a -5V rail. That gives a total rail-to-rail
voltage of 17V for the OP07 precision
op amp IC.
The external circuit is connected
through CON2, with its high side on
pin 2, and current flowing through
series-connected resistors to the low
side at pin 1. It is independent of and
isolated from the power supply to the
circuit, although both pins of CON2
must remain within the range -14V to
+80V with respect to the GND terminal on CON1.
The three low-value resistors have
a combined series resistance of 0.21W,
and the voltages generated across them
are detected by IC1 and IC2 and amplified 50 times by each. These two ICs
provide two current ranges, and they
are switched by relay RLY1 under the
control of LM358 op amp IC4.
At power-on, the non-inverting pin
3 input of IC4 is held to 0.5V (TP3) due
Australia's electronics magazine
to the voltage divider formed by trimpot VR4 and the 12kW fixed resistor.
With no external load at CON1, output pin 5 of IC2, and hence pin 2 of
IC4, remain near 0V. The pin 1 output
of IC4 therefore goes high, activating
DPDT relay RLY1 and lighting LED1.
This connects IC1’s output to IC3,
an OP07 precision op amp set with a
gain of approximately two times. The
total gain will therefore be around
100 times.
With zero input, an INA282 can
output go almost to the negative supply rail but not quite – approximately
40mV minimum remains. This is cancelled out by a 4.7MW resistor to the
-5V supply rail (its value may need to
be slightly lower, eg, 3.9MW, to get 0
output with no current flowing).
This is then followed by another
4mV of precise trimming of IC3’s offset voltage by VR2 to measure zero
volts on the voltmeter. There is a certain satisfaction in measuring 0.0000V
correctly to four decimal places!
IC1 detects the voltage generated across the two 0.1W 5W series-
connected resistors for the range 0-1A.
The maximum power dissipated by
these at the full 1A is only 200mW.
IC2 detects the voltage across the
0.01W Welwyn current sense resistor (Jaycar RR3420). It is a very stable (extremely low temperature coefficient), low-inductance 1% resistor
siliconchip.com.au
and covers the range 1-10A. Its maximum dissipation at 10A is 1W, and it
just passes the ‘finger test’. Of course,
it is well within its 3W rating.
With 1A flowing through CON1,
the two 0.1W resistors in series drop
a total of 200mV, which is amplified
by IC1 by 50 times to produce 10.0V.
Its pin 5 output voltage is reduced by
VR3 and its series resistor, to 0.5V,
and fed through the contacts of RLY1
to IC3 (if selected).
At the same 1.0A current, the 0.01W
resistor drops just 10mV. IC2 amplifies
this by 50 times, again to 0.5V, and it
flows through the other relay contact
to IC3 (if selected). The pin 5 output
of IC2 is also connected to the inverting input of op amp IC4 (pin 2), and
IC4 controls the switching of the relay.
With 0.5V on pin 3 of IC4, the range
change occurs seamlessly around 1A.
The 1MW resistor provides feedback hysteresis so that the relay
doesn’t chatter if the current is hovering around 1A. Once it passes the
threshold to switch, it must change
by a few tens of milliamperes in the
opposite direction before the relay will
switch back.
At the changeover from the low to
high range, the other pole of the relay
shorts out the two 0.1W resistors. The
relay’s contact resistance is unimportant as only the current through the
siliconchip.com.au
0.01W resistor is displayed in this case.
Shorting out those resistors is important, though. Otherwise, the pair would
dissipate a total of 20W at 10A!
Calibration is easy once the 4.7MW
resistor has been varied (if necessary)
to get a 0V output at 0A. Series connect a power supply, a variable resistive load and an accurate DMM on
the amps range through CON1. First,
apply a current of approximately 2.0A
continuously. The relay should switch
off, as indicated by LED1.
Adjust VR1 until the numerical output of the DMM is matched by the voltmeter connected to CON3.
Next, reduce the current to approximately 200mA, changing your DMM
to the mA range if required. The relay
and the LED should switch back on.
Adjust VR3 until the readout on your
meter again matches the DMM output.
Do not reverse these two sequences.
I am impressed with the linearity
and accuracy of the INA282 ICs. At
10A exactly, the Fluke 87V started
flashing its maximum warning display, and the meter under test registered 9.98A. With a 12V supply, the
current displayed actually reached
11.3A before plateauing. At the low
end, the display remained accurate
down to about 40-50mA, with a 4mA
difference apparent below about
25mA.
Australia's electronics magazine
One distinct advantage of my circuit
is that you can run up to 10A continuously without overheating or damage
if the circuit is free to air as an unenclosed panel meter. Most multimeters,
including my Fluke 87V, can only handle 10A in about 30-second bursts to
prevent overheating or other damage.
The current consumption in the circuit is low, about 10mA on the high
range, rising to 40mA on the low range
due to the power consumed by the
relay coil.
Colin O’Donnell,
Adelaide, SA. ($90)
December 2025 81
PART 3: PHIL PROSSER
Digital
Preamplifier
and Crossover
Last month, we assembled and tested the three PCBs used in our new Digital Preamplifier,
which uses digital signal processing (DSP) rather than analog techniques. It isn’t just a
preamp – it can also perform as an active crossover. Now we’ll describe how to prepare the
case, mount the modules, wire it up and use it.
O
nce you have assembled & tested
the three Digital Preamplifier
PCBs, it is time to prepare the
case so we can fit everything into it
and wire the boards up.
The first job is to drill and cut the
holes in the rear panel so that you
can get the main PCB into position,
as many of its connectors go through
that panel. We have provided a drilling guide for this panel in Fig.17.
This is a view of the rear panel from
the outside, rotated 90° and shown
at half scale (50%) so it will fit in the
magazine.
Ensure you make the measurements from the outside of the panel.
We applied a layer of masking tape
over the whole rear panel and used
a fine felt-tip pen to make a very precise transcription of the cutting and
drilling guide.
Another option is to print Fig.17 at
exactly twice its original size (200%
scale), line it up and stick it onto the
82
Silicon Chip
panel, then mark the hole positions
with a punch or pilot drill. Since the
panel artwork at 200% size won’t fit
on an A4 sheet of paper, if you don’t
have an A3 printer, you could print it
across a couple of sheets with some
overlap so you can line them up.
Centre punch the holes, as you want
the drilled holes to be located as accurately as possible. Having marked the
hole positions, it’s a good idea to line
up the PCB as a sanity check, to make
sure they are all correct before drilling.
You don’t want to end up with holes
in the wrong places!
We started drilling with a 1.5mm
pilot drill bit to get the initial holes
exactly centred, then increased the
hole sizes in a series of steps to ensure
the centres were accurately located.
If you go straight from punching to
using a large bit, it will have a tendency to wander initially, so even if
you punched the exact centre, the large
hole may be offset. Slowly increasing
Australia's electronics magazine
the size with a series of larger bits
mostly eliminates that error.
It is important that the screw retention holes for the dual RCA connectors
are in the right spots; by comparison,
the larger 11mm holes really just need
to clear the metal ground connection
on the RCA socket, and they can be
filed a little larger if needs be.
Also make sure that you get the
placement on the rear panel at the
specified height. This has been
selected to ensure clearance between
the screw holes in the bottom panel.
If the board is mounted too low, you
will have possible interference with
the PCB. As you test-fit the board,
check these clearances on the back
of the PCB.
As specified, there is about 3mm
clearance between the pins on the bottom of the PCB and threaded inserts
on the bottom of the case.
The IEC and two other square holes
are easily made by drilling many small
siliconchip.com.au
holes and filing these to shape. The
panel is soft aluminium, so it won’t
take a lot of filing to get right. Check
the fuse holder and IEC socket fit as
you file, as it is easy to take more off
than you want.
We countersunk the RCA screw
holes using an 8mm drill bit to reduce
the protrusion of these screws near the
RCA sockets. Once you’ve made all
these holes, check that the connectors
on the main PCB will fit through those
holes without binding.
Front panel preparation
Now is also a good time to drill and
cut the holes in the front panel, as per
Fig.18. This is a view from the outside
of the front panel. The procedure is
much the same, although it should be
quite a bit easier this time, as there are
just six holes to drill, plus one rectangular cut-out to make.
Like with the rear panel, we covered
the whole front panel with masking
tape and marked the hole locations
before drilling. The presence of masking tape has a benefit of reducing the
chance of scratching the panel while
working it.
The front panel drilling is complicated by the need to mount the LCD
screen. We have specified a 3D-printed
bezel for the LCD that we have used on
a couple of projects now. This is in an
STL file named “Altronics Z7018 LCD
Bezel v8.stl”, which you can download
from siliconchip.au/Shop/11/2917
Our cut-out matches this, but if
you want to take a different approach
to mounting the LCD, you need to
consider the actual LCD and how it
mounts. The 3D-printed bezel also
ensures electrical isolation of the LCD
from the chassis.
One challenge we faced is that the
space between the extrusions on the
inside of the front panel leaves only
36mm. This is not a lot of space for
a display, which limited our choice.
You can use the ‘drill and file’
method for making odd-shaped holes;
it is tedious, but the results are generally good. In this case, we used our
Dremel rotary cutting tool with a thin
metal cutoff disc.
We found that being careful with our
siliconchip.com.au
rotary tool, we were able to cut the vast
majority of the LCD hole neatly, and
only had to file a little in the corners
to get them just right. Remember that
the bezel will cover this cutout, so if
there is a little roughness around the
edges, that will be hidden by the bezel.
Mounting the main PCB
The locations of the holes that need
to be drilled in the base panel are
shown in Fig.19; ignore the grid of
blue-outlined holes on the left-hand
side for now and just make the black
outlined holes. These include four for
mounting the main PCB (the four holes
marked “A” that run down the middle
from the top).
However, we recommend that once
you have drilled the rear panel, you
dry-fit the main PCB to it and mark
the locations on the base for the four
mounting holes on the opposite edge
of the PCB. This will ensure that they
are in the right positions, so that the
board is not stressed once installed.
To mount the Digital Preamplifier PCB to the rear panel, jiggle the
RCA sockets into the holes drilled
for them and secure using a couple of
6mm-long, 4GA self-tapping screws
(we used Jiffy box screws from Altronics). Now see where the holes line up
with the base of the chassis. We stuck
masking tape to the chassis and used
this to mark where to drill the mounting holes.
Once drilled, secure the PCB to the
base using tapped spacers, 6mm M3
machine screws and shakeproof washers. With this in place, you have completed the trickiest part of the assembly process.
Power supply assembly
Mount the power supply board
also using tapped spacers, machine
screws and shakeproof washers. It is
attached via four mounting holes in
a roughly rectangular pattern on the
right-hand side of Fig.19. Orientate it
so the heatsinks are roughly centred
in the case, with the terminal blocks
near the main PCB.
This requires four 10mm standoffs,
6mm panhead machine screws and
crinkle washers. If in doubt, refer to
Australia's electronics magazine
◀
Figs.17 & 18: the rear panel drilling details are on the lefthand side of this
diagram. This is shown from the outside of the case; note the orientation labels
and that this is at 50% scale. Try to position the holes as accurately as you
can (there is some leeway, but not a lot). The holes required in the front panel
are presented in the righthand side of this diagram. The edges of the large
rectangular cut-out will be covered by the 3D-printed LCD bezel.
Fig.19: the case bottom panel drilling details. All the smaller holes are 3.5mm
in diameter. While we have provided their locations, the four holes for the
PCB standoffs for the edge of the main board should be marked and drilled
with the board fitted to the rear panel. The blue-outlined holes in the left are
the ventilation pattern for the lid, not the base, and are shown rotated 180°
compared to the rest to avoid interfering with PCB mounting holes.
Fig.21. This board is Earthed through
the chassis via an exposed pad under
one of the mounting screws.
This connection is made through
one of the spacers that attaches the
Power Supply board to the case and
Earths the board through exposed
metal under the screw head. Therefore, you should scrape away the paint
under the screw head that attaches
this spacer to the case to ensure it is
Earthed properly.
After mounting the Power Supply
board, use a multimeter to measure the
resistance from the power supply PCB
ground to chassis Earth and ensure the
reading is under 1W.
Before going any further, you will
need to make the safety panel from
a sheet of 1mm-thick aluminium,
Presspahn or similar. This panel will
be placed between the mains section and the low-voltage section. We
made ours from a 46 × 225mm piece
of 1mm-thick aluminium. The intent
of this part is to ensure physical separation of these sections in the case.
Cut it to the dimensions shown in
Fig.20 and drill the five holes.
Next, fold the two tabs up by 90°.
Start by scoring along the edge; if it’s
made of Presspahn, it should be easy
to fold using a ruler. For aluminium,
you can clamp the tabs between two
pieces of straight timber tightly in a
vice, with the bend line right at the
top, then carefully bend the part projecting out over until it hits the top of
the timber.
The folding is most easily done with
a little encouragement from a hammer,
using a piece of timber against the aluminium to avoid dents. We intentionally cut out a section of the 10mm lip
to avoid it running under the transformer. Ensure you cut this out.
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
84
Silicon Chip
The main PCB is only
attached to the bottom
of the case along one
edge. At the other end, it
attaches to the rear panel
via numerous screws into
the RCA socket housings.
This version is using the
DSP board and you can
see some of the ribbon
cables connecting the LCD
screen and front panel controls.
We used 3mm rivnuts on this section
to make assembly easier (they’re basically internally threaded rivets). If you
don’t have a rivnut tool, you will need
to use nuts, bolts and lock washers to
install this. Insert a 9.5mm hole grommet in the large hole to ensure there
are no sharp edges that might cut the
insulation of the transformer wires running through to the power supply PCB.
You will note that we painted ours
satin black; this is purely for aesthetics. Make sure this panel is installed
prior to the transformer.
The mains wiring is made with 7.5A
mains-rated medium-duty wire, referring to the wiring diagram, Fig.21:
1. Mount the front panel to the case
and install and tighten the power
switch, ready for wiring.
2. Also mount and install the IEC
connector and fuse holder to the rear
panel.
3. Solder a length of green/yellow-
striped mains-rated wire to a solder
lug, then attach the other end to the
Earth terminal of the IEC mains input
connector. Scrape away any paint on
the case around the Earth lug mounting
hole, then attach the solder lug with a
16mm M3 machine screw, hex nut and
crinkle washers. Tighten it and verify
that there is a low resistance from the
mains input Earth pin and the chassis’s exposed metal work.
4. Using blue wire, run a Neutral
connection from the IEC connector
terminal marked “N” through to one
of the upper terminals on the DPDT
mains switch (not the common terminal). Insulate both these connections to ensure there is no possibility
of accidentally touching any live parts
(Neutral and Active can sometimes be
swapped in house wiring or extension cords).
siliconchip.com.au
5. Using brown wire, connect the
“A” terminal of the IEC connector
to the end connector of the fuse
holder. Again, insulate this well. We
added a short length of 13mm diameter heatshrink tubing, which we ultimately used to cover the whole rear
of the fuse holder.
6. Continue with brown wire from
the other terminal of the fuse holder
to the switch terminal next to the one
you’ve already connected, at the top on
the other side. Again, insulate this well.
7. Connect the blue wire from the
transformer to the middle terminal of
the switch below the existing neutral
wire. Similarly, connect the brown
wire from the transformer to the terminal below the existing brown wire
connection. Insulate both well.
8. Add insulation to the unused
terminals on the switch ‘just in case’.
Wiring up the power supply
Next, loosely mount the transformer, making sure to include two
rubber washers underneath it (with
one between the transformer and the
dish that holds it in place). Sleeve the
four secondary wires together with
heatshrink tubing after cutting them to
a length that will allow them to comfortably reach the inputs of the power
supply PCB, without too much slack.
Ensure that the two wires that go
to the middle two “GND” positions
of CON1/CON4 on the power supply
board are from opposite ends of the
two windings (ie, start/finish and not
start/start or finish/finish).
You can verify this once the unit
is powered up by measuring the AC
voltage between the outermost two
terminals of those blocks. You should
measure close to 24V AC. If you get
close to 0V AC, they are not phased
correctly, or there is a bad connection.
Fig.20: the safety panel shown at actual size. This can be made from aluminium,
Presspahn or another thick insulating material. Cut the rectangle to size, remove
the notch, drill the holes, then score and bend the two tabs up by 90°.
Australia's electronics magazine
December 2025 85
N
Australia's electronics magazine
470mF
4148
1
+
+
~
KBL404
BR1
~
1
1
1
470mF
2200mF
+
2200mF
+
F2 1A
F1 1A
470mF
10mF
10mF
10mF
100nF
470mF
100nF 100nF
47mF
100kW
CON13
47mH
100nF
100kW
100kW
J1
J2
+
470mF
470mF
+
220mF
4.7kW
10kW
J3
10kW
4.7kW
1
miniDSP
MCHStreamer
+ 100nF
100nF
2200mF
100nF
100nF
100nF
470mF
2200mF
100nF
4.7kW
100nF
100nF
10nF
100nF
+
10mF
470mF
100nF
100nF
2200mF
2200mF
100mF
10mF
47mH
100mF
47mH
100mF
4004
10mF
4004
220W
10mF
100nF
+
10kW
10kW
1mF
+
+
COIL
10nF
Microcontroller
10mF
100nF
100mF
100mF
220mF
10kW
10kW
4148
100pF
100kW
100pF
22mF
100pF
4148
COIL
100kW
100nF
100pF
4148
10kW
10kW
10kW
10kW
470pF
22mF
47mF
COIL
100kW
100nF
DOWN 22nF
S2
2025-03-24
5.6nF
CLIP
100nF
100nF
150pF
10kW
1kW
100pF
22mF
GND
UP 22nF
S2
+ 100mF
100nF
CON1
TGM Was Here
Mar 2024
1
180W
180W
2.7nF
100nF
22nF
RE1
22nF
2.7nF
100nF
2.7nF
DAC Ch4
1
100nF
27nF
+
200W
1
ITSOP4136
TP1
B A CK
S1 22nF
2.7nF
IRD1
22nF
IR R X
CON2
100nF
Q14.4
4148
2.7nF
100nF
+
200W
100nF
10W
200W
10W
200W
180W
180W
100nF
8.2nF
2.7nF
100nF
27nF
+
100mF
2.7nF
DAC Ch1
1
2.7nF
100nF
27nF
2.7nF
COIL
CON8.4
OUT1
100W
100nF RLY6.4
8.2nF
100mF
+
100nF
8.2nF
8.2nF 8.2nF 8.2nF
100nF
27nF
2.7nF
DAC Ch2
1
100nF
CON8.3
OUT2
100mF
10W
200W
10W
200W
180W
180W
27nF
+
COIL
RLY6.3
2.7nF
100nF
2.7nF
100nF
2.7nF
100mF
+
200W
100nF
8.2nF
8.2nF
Q14.3
4148
8.2nF
100nF
2.7nF
8.2nF
27nF
100mF
10W
200W
10W
200W
180W
180W
100nF
Mar 2025
Digital Preamp V2.3a
TGM Was Here 2025
100nF
COIL
RLY6.2
DAC Ch3
2.7nF
100nF
27nF
+
100mF
100nF
8.2nF
8.2nF
Q14.2
4148
8.2nF
100nF
8.2nF
100mF
10W
200W
10W
2.7nF
100nF
COIL
RLY6.1
200W
27nF
+
FOR PCM1794A
200W TO 270W
8.2nF TO 2.7nF
180W TO 0W
8.2nF
8.2nF
Q14.1
BC547
4148
FOR PCM1794A
220W TO 560W
OMIT 27nF
Digital Preamp
Controls v1.1
DSP CORE
100nF
+
+
100mF
FOR PCM1794A
2.7nF TO 2.2nF
820W TO 750W
100mF
47mF
10mF
BAT85
100mF
100nF
100mF
+
100nF
ADC
47mF
47mF
47mF
10W
10W
10W
10W
100W
100W
47mF
CON8.2
OUT3
5
Note: as with
any anodised
aluminium, the
rack enclosure
will not necessarily
have the rear, side,
front and top panels
Earthed due to the
anodising providing
an insulating layer
between the panels.
Each panel should be
checked for electrical
continuity to the bottom
Earthed plate. That also
applies to the internal
safety panel if it is
made from metal. Use
separate Earth wiring
between panels that
don’t become Earthed
when assembled using
Earth wire and crimp
eyelets and ensuring
the anodising is
scraped off at the
mounting positions.
LCD MODULE
10mF
1.5kW
100nF
10mF
10mF
100nF
100nF
1.5kW
23
34
220W
DVDD3.3
12
1
10mF
10mF
4148
COIL
100pF
22mF
22mF
INPUT SWITCHING
100pF
100kW
680W
100nF 220W
4004
PIC32MX270F256D-50I/PT
GND
47mH
4148
COIL
75W
75W
DIGITAL I/O
4.7kW
10kW
Power
+ Supply
4.7kW
4148
4.7kW
4148
4148
+
4.7kW
4004
CON14
5819
22mF
1
2
3
4.7kW
10kW
+
22mF
4.7kW
22mF
100kW
4.7kW
BAT85
BAT85
BAT85
BAT85
100nF
+
100kW
+
4004
4004
47kW
+
+
E
+
A
+
T1
12V+12V 30VA
+
4004
BAT85
100kW
4.7kW
100kW
4.7kW
5.6W
91W
91W
BAT85
100pF
100kW
1kW
680W
BAT85
BAT85
BAT85
BAT85
680W
680W
100nF
680W
470pF
470pF
470pF
CON7
1kW
91W
91W
10kW
1kW
47kW
100nF
47kW
BAT85
47kW
100W
4.7kW
10kW
100W
47kW
180W
200W
220W
100nF
22nF
820W
220W
10kW
1kW
10kW
220W
220W
820W
820W
10kW
CON8.1
OUT4
10kW
CON6
MONITOR
OUT
10kW
180W
47kW
100W
4.7kW
BC547
220W
820W
820W
220W
220W
100W
47kW
220W
100W
47kW
180W
180W
200W
220W
180W
180W
200W
820W
820W
220W
47kW
100W
4.7kW
BC547
220W
820W
820W
220W
220W
820W
820W
220W
47kW
100W
4.7kW
BC547
220W
820W
820W
47kW
180W
180W
200W
200W
220W
Silicon Chip
820W
86
820W
820W
3
Fig.21: this shows all
the low-voltage and
mains wiring, which
are separated by the
safety panel. Make sure
you follow the mains
wiring details carefully
and insulate all exposed
terminals, except for the
Earth terminals, which
may be left uninsulated.
Don’t forget to tie the
wires down with cable
ties.
siliconchip.com.au
Above: a neat trick to getting the PCB front mounting holes in exactly the right
spot on the base of the case is to mount the rear panel to the case, and put
some masking tape gently under the standoffs. Push them down and they will
magically mark the exact locations to drill.
Right: a close-up of the mains wiring. Between the insulation & separating panel,
none of the wires can come loose and contact any of the low-voltage circuitry.
Now use zip ties to secure all the
mains wiring to the base plate using
the holes provided, as shown in Fig.21.
Ensure there is only a little slack in all
the mains wires.
Mounting the control board
The control PCB is secured to the
front panel using the rotary controller’s threaded bush and the supplied
nut. The three pushbutton switches
need to be jiggled to get their shanks
to fit into the holes we drilled. If
any were soldered in slightly askew,
you will need to adjust them. Having these a snug fit ensures the front
panel controls are all solid and steady
in use.
Once it is mounted, install the
washer and tighten the rotary encoder
shaft screw. As noted earlier, adding epoxy or silicone sealant
around the pushbuttons on the
inside of the case will provide
increased tolerance to rough treatment.
Fit the LCD bezel into the front
panel and, once it is neat, glue it in
place with a few dabs of neutral-cure
silicone sealant. Allow this to set,
ready to install the LCD once it has
its cable plugged in.
Finishing the wiring
Next, we need to connect the +5V
DC and ±10V DC outputs of the power
supply
board to the main Digital Preamp board. Use lightweight
hookup wire, and select colours that
will avoid you making errors in the
connection. The connections required
are shown in Fig.21, although the exact
routing shown is not necessarily ideal;
refer to the photos to see how we ran
the wires.
We ran heatshrink over the groups of
wires to ensure things remained tidy,
and ran the wires under the Digital
The final power supply PCB uses two terminal blocks for the transformer connection, making connecting the AC inputs
easier. Also note that in the final boards, we have moved the DC input on the Digital Preamp board in from the edge of the
board, so making connections to it is easier.
siliconchip.com.au
Australia's electronics magazine
December 2025 87
Preamp PCB. It is a tight fit to get the
wires up and out between the safety
screen and the Digital preamplifier
PCB – there is a 5mm gap, which is just
wide enough to fish them out.
In the final design, we have shifted
the power connectors inboard from
their original position on the Digital
Preamplifier board to give you a little
more room to get the wires into the
screw terminals.
We ran the ribbon cables under
the power supply PCB as this makes
things neat. Fold the ribbon cable so
that the connector mates up to the control board and LCD neatly. Ensure that
the red stripe of both wires connects
to pin 1 at both ends.
Fig.21 shows an alphanumeric LCD
with a SIL header soldered to an adaptor board to allow the IDC connector
to plug in. That is a valid way to connect it, but you will see from our photos that we used an LCD screen with
a DIL header that the IDC connector
plugged into directly. Whichever way
you do it, make sure the wiring is correct such that the GNDs of the two
boards are joined.
Now attach rubber feet to the bottom
of the case to stop the screws in the
chassis scratching up your workbench.
Lid preparation
If the Digital Preamplifier is to be
used in a very warm environment, it is
a good idea to augment the ventilation
in the case lid over the power supply
heatsinks. The Altronics H0625 heatsinks specified are dissipating in the
region of 2.5W each. They have a thermal resistance to ambient of 10°C/W,
which in free air would mean a 25°C
rise in temperature above ambient.
However, the case compromises
this, because the internal temperature will rise above the ambient temperature of the surrounding air. Many
of our tests were carried out in a hot
room (35°C) and the Digital Preamplifier case was measured to be 45°C. This
results in the LM317/LM337 devices
sitting at around 67°C. This is well in
specification for them, but higher than
we would prefer.
Using a larger heatsink for these
devices didn’t help a lot. The right
thing to do is to get the heat out of
the case by increasing the ventilation
over these heatsinks. We did this by
marking and drilling an array of 5.5mm
holes, which does not take that long
to do.
88
Silicon Chip
The process we used was to first
mark the locations (see Fig.19), centre
punch them all and drill 2mm pilot
holes, then the 5.5mm holes, finishing with an 8mm drill bit to deburr
the holes. A coat of satin black paint
on the lid tidies this up nicely.
Labels
You can now install the labels for
the rear and front panels. We thought
about getting the front and real panels engraved, but the logistics and cost
put us off.
So we came up with some simple labels that we 3D printed. The
approach was to print a 1.5mm-thick
base layer using black filament, then
we have extruded the text for our labels
to be 0.8mm higher than this base.
When printing these, we wait until
the base layers are printed, then pause
the printer and change the filament to
a contrasting colour.
One preamp got gold labelling, and
another red. We then used a couple of
tiny dabs (a dab is less than a drop)
of superglue to affix the labels to the
panels. We used a run of masking tape
to define the mounting line so all are
affixed level and even.
We think this is not a bad way to
label the Digital Preamplifier. You
might come up with another method.
Perhaps you’re keen to dust off the
old Dymo and give it some of those
oh-so-stylish green labels!
Using the Digital Preamplifier
The Preamplifier works just like any
preamplifier, except it has many more
features. The first time you use it, make
Once your unit has been fully assembled, it should look something like this. You
don’t need the extra bits of aluminium we added to the heatsinks. Double-check
all the mains wiring and insulation before powering it up.
very sure that you set your crossovers
to appropriate bands for your drivers,
and that you turn the volume down to
a sensible level before you power on
any connected amplifiers. If you don’t,
you might be very surprised by some
loud noises, and could damage your
expensive speakers.
The best way to set up the crossover
will come down to what test equipment you have and how you are using
it. Some of our active systems are only
a subwoofer channel added to a good
pair of speakers. It is entirely possible to set up such systems pretty well
by ear.
On the other hand, if you want to
time align your speakers and implement a full multi-channel crossover,
you will need some measurement
equipment. The first thing to set up is
the time alignment of your speakers;
after that, the crossovers will behave
much as you would expect.
We have set limits on the volume
control that allow you to turn the volume up to 11 (in fact, the maximum
gain is 12dB). Be aware that turning
the volume up on this preamplifier
will generate no noise unless your
input is noisy – so treat that control
with respect. The good news is: no
more pots that get scratchy over time!
Remember that pushing the control knob in saves your settings; this
includes the selected input and current volume. So the next time you turn
it on everything will load up and the
volume will be where you left it. Past
this, we hope you enjoy your truly digital preamplifier. Here’s a quick run
through the user interface.
In the idle/normal state:
● The rotary encoder simply
changes the volume.
● Channel selection is via
the buttons to the left.
● The ‘back’ button to the right
changes the interface into the Function Select state.
● Push on the main encoder saves
the current state to EEPROM.
In the Function Select state:
● The rotary encoder allows selection of:
> Volume
> Channel Setup
> EQ Setup
> Save
> Load
● Pushing the encoder selects that
function.
● Pressing ‘back’ exits.
The Channel setup menu:
● Allows selection of channel 1-4.
● For each channel in turn, you can
make live adjustments of:
> Low-frequency crossover slope (6,
12, 24 or 48dB per octave)
> Low-frequency crossover point:
5Hz to 15kHz
> High-frequency crossover slope
(6, 12, 24 or 48dB per octave)
> High frequency crossover point:
5Hz to 15kHz
> Channel attenuation: 0-20dB in
1dB steps
> Channel delay: in 1.7mm steps
(rounded on the display)
> Mono selection: for channel 1,
allowing you to mono a subwoofer
output
● Invert selection: allowing you to
invert the audio output on individual
channels
The Equaliser Setup:
● Allows selection of Common
EQ1-3 and Channel 1-4 Equalisers 1-3
each (15 in total)
● For each of these:
> EQ: off or parametric
> Centre Frequency: adjustable
> Q: from 0.1 to 10
> Gain: -10dB to +10dB (range can
be increased by modifying software
but this should be enough)
Load and save loads or saves the
selected set of parameters to EEPROM.
Conclusion
This is the first fully digital preamplifier we’ve published, and one of
the most complex circuits we have
described. While it will take some
time to assemble, it isn’t an especially
difficult job overall, and we think the
SC
result will be well worth it!
December 2025 89
SERVICEMAN’S LOG
The Bad Old Days
I’ve been a little out of sorts these
past few months, what with our
winter and general cold and
miserable weather. I’m also not
getting any younger, and as with all
machines, mechanical or biological,
they tend to inevitably break down
over time. I am no different.
The old trope, “at least we have our health”, sometimes
doesn’t hold a lot of water. I’m not on my last legs or anything, not by a long chalk (hopefully!), but dealing with
any kind of out-of-the-ordinary health status is exhausting.
Anyway, enough of the excuses and doom and gloom.
I wrote recently about fixing stuff remotely. This has
become a much more viable option than travelling all
over the city for me these days, especially for smaller
jobs that really don’t warrant the time or the journey.
The problem is that when it comes to payment, the customer suddenly resists paying for the repair, more so than
when I go to them.
The fact is that as I am a one-man band these days, no
longer enjoying the luxury of two vans and four techs working for the company. All
that was lost in the
aftermath of the
‘quakes here. I
had to radically
downsize and
shed my staff,
90
Silicon Chip
Dave Thompson
Items Covered This Month
• Remote work and remote pay
• Repairing shop signage
• Converting torches to wireless charging
• Tinkering with a guitar amplifier
Dave Thompson runs PC Anytime in Christchurch, NZ.
Website: www.pcanytime.co.nz
Email: dave<at>pcanytime.co.nz
Cartoonist – Louis Decrevel
Website: loueee.com
which I really hated doing; I kept them on as long as I
could, but the writing was on the wall.
I went from an average of 65 calls a day to zero overnight, extending for the six months after the bigger ‘quakes
fizzled out. It was a tough time for everyone.
Anyway, driving somewhere takes up time I could be
in the workshop, and it is more than reasonable to charge
extra for going out onsite, just as most call-out type service
people do. Some charge by the distance from base, or time
on the road, or just wrap it into the final fee.
Even with pre-empting any possible surprises by making it clear what the costs will likely be, some people balk
once I’m there and have done the job. It’s a tough ask to
argue my case when standing in someone else’s living room.
This is a fact of life for many service staff. I’ll bet many of
the people reading this have been in exactly the same situation. Sometimes, it can be very intimidating, especially
if there are others hanging about who feel they need to get
involved and stand up for the original caller/customer.
I’ve walked away from more than a few jobs, for various
reasons, and taken the financial hit, but all that has taught
me over the years to be much more careful and selective
about the places I go and the jobs I take on. The truth is, I
don’t go to many call-outs now anyway, triaging all potential problems and deciding if the repair is better carried
out in my workshop.
That said, some of my long-time clients are now
in their dotage and can no longer travel, so I will
usually make the exception to go out to see them,
mainly because I know that they are good people
who are prepared to pay and are well aware of the
added costs a call-out entails. They are usually very grateful that I go out, and I am happy to support them after
sometimes 25 years of their custom.
Of course, during the pandemic, all this had to stop
due to lockdown laws, requiring a different approach.
Often, I would walk people through potentially simple problems over the phone, and they would send an
electronic payment for my time.
This approaching worked for a few common problems,
but for the bigger ones; if the computer doesn’t boot at all, or
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
loops on startup (for example), it needs to be on the bench
for me to be able to fully get to the bottom of things. This
usually means I have to go and get it, especially if the client can’t make it in easily; otherwise, they bring it to me.
So, all well and good for computer work. Some repairs
can be done remotely, some can’t, and we stumbled through
those dark days.
But what about other things, like appliances or music
gear? I mentioned helping someone fix an electric roller
blind recently, but during pandemic times (and on either
side of it), I have helped a few people out using social
media and apps like Teams and Zoom.
Obviously, it is more difficult just doing it with a chatonly type app, as we have to rely on descriptions and a lot
more communication than someone simply playing their
camera over the device, catching the model name and number and other details that might give me a clue on how to
repair it (if that is even viable – many appliances these
days are not designed to be easily repaired).
Plus, there are laws in some countries that don’t allow
people to repair their own appliances and instead need a
licensed repair person to do it. I have seen some cowboy
repairs over the years, but such laws mean that repairable
appliances will end up being dumped because licensed
repair can be incredibly expensive these days – just the callout fee can be more than the cost of a replacement appliance!
(You have to wonder who would know if you opened
something up and fixed it yourself – assuming you didn’t get
electrocuted or burn the house down in the process. Many
replacement parts are available from overseas, of course.)
Anyway, I was once communicating via email with a
guy who lived overseas, and he was having a problem with
a dishwasher. I had written about a similar concern with
ours (two actually) in my columns a while back, and he
must have read one or the other, or been told I had written about it.
He asked for advice on what to do and was prepared to
pay for my time. As always, I said we’d see what we were
dealing with and talk about money when the time came.
He was on WhatsApp, so I sent my number, and he video
called me soon after. We went through the pleasantries and
siliconchip.com.au
then the ‘show me the appliance’ scenario. He was very
thorough and gave a good tour of it, including pictures
of the brand and model numbers on the label inside the
door frame.
The brand was unknown to me and was likely some
in-house, re-branded unit made for one of the big box
stores over there (this turned out to be the case). Regardless,
most of these dishwashers work pretty much the same way.
This six-year-old one would start, fill with water, but
wouldn’t go any further. It just sat there humming slightly
(an unusual noise to the owner), and thus not completing
the cycle. He had manually scooped as much of the water
out as he could, but it was no solution. He also couldn’t
find the user manual, so he emailed me, asking if I could
offer any advice.
There are really only a few things that can make this scenario happen. Water pressure fills the unit, sensors detect
the level and stop the filling. Then the wash cycle starts,
and the now-heated water should circulate through the
sprayers and pre-rinse the dishes before the pellet or powder drops into the chamber.
A wax motor built into the powder drawer heats up
and opens the door at the right time, dumping detergent
into the water (which wasn’t happening). And of course,
it never got to emptying the grey water to prepare for the
next rinse cycle, so it just sat there.
There were no error codes to go by, as the control panel
was very simple, with just a settings knob and a start/stop
button – no display other than a couple of LED ‘idiot lights’.
It seemed apparent to me right away that the pump
was either fouled or had failed, although the fact that it
hummed might indicate that the pump was trying to move
but couldn’t for some reason. It could also be a pump controller valve not operating properly, if it were the type of
machine to have such a valve.
I advised him to unplug the dishwasher or switch it off
at the wall, which he did. I then suggested we go through
some basic checks, such as the filter and the pump impeller (if it was even visible).
Australia's electronics magazine
December 2025 91
Most filters come out easily in dishwashers, as they are
intended to be taken out for regular cleaning. He said he’d
never done it.
He played his phone camera over the floor on the inside
of the unit, and I could see the filter assembly there, with
the centre almost like a hollow drain plug with a hard
plastic surround, and a metal skirt around that with tiny
holes in it. I suggested he look closely at it to see if there
were any arrows embossed into the plastic to indicate how
it comes out.
He found one arrow and twisted the centre hub that way
to release the bayonet-style thread that held it in. He then
lifted the whole piece from the floor. I could see right away
it was choked with hair and food debris – they had two
dogs – and that certainly would not be helping things. I
asked him to clean the whole thing thoroughly and call me
back when he was ready to put the cleaned filter back in.
This he duly did, showing off his handiwork. I also
asked him to make sure the dishwasher hadn’t moved in
its cavity. Sometimes (rarely), they can move off any floor
mounting system (if they have one), and crush or kink the
outlet hose, again causing water not to flow.
It’s unlikely and wouldn’t explain the not-washing symptom; however, I have seen installers just sit them on the
ground, and if people shut the door too hard, they can bump
the thing back by a few millimetres at a time. So, while
we were at it, it warranted checking. He grabbed the sides
and pulled toward him, but it seemed to be fixed firmly to
the ground. At least that ruled one potential problem out.
I then asked him to shine his phone torch down the filter cavity and see what he could see. He reported that he
couldn’t see much at all, as there was still some water lying
in it, so I got him to feel around in there with his fingers,
just to make sure there wasn’t anything physically fouling
the pump inlet. There was nothing as far as he could tell.
That was about as far as I could go with it on a walkthrough. I got him to reassemble the filter, ensuring the
barrel was twisted back into place to lock it, power it back
on and try to run the quickest cycle he could. I said to call
back when it got to the point of it washing or draining.
20 minutes later he called and said he could hear some
water splashing around but nothing draining, and it was
taking longer than usual. At this point, I took a guess that
the pump was getting tired, and after a quick search, found
they were available on a wide array of online repair sites.
The problem was, this guy wasn’t confident enough to
tear it down and tackle the job himself, so he said he’d
call a guy in.
That was the end of my involvement. I told him not to
worry about paying me. A few days later, I got an email
from him telling me it took the service guy about an hour
to pull the machine out, strip it down and swap out the
pump, and now it was working fine. He again offered to
at least give me something for my time, so he sent a small
‘donation’ via PayPal, and we were both happy.
Another very remote fix was for a solid-state guitar amplifier owned by a former bandmate of mine who now lives in
the south of England. This guy is reasonably capable, and
on social media, he asked me if I could walk him through
fixing what he considered a reasonably simple problem
with his solid-state, 50W combo amplifier.
A combo is so-called as it has one or more built-in guitar speakers, with the amplifier mounted above it, all in a
92
Silicon Chip
single case. That way, the whole thing is self-contained and
usually smaller and theoretically easier to carry around to
gigs than a separate speaker cabinet and amp ‘head’ unit.
The problem was that one of the input jacks, a 6.5mm
mono type, had fallen into the guts of the amp, and likely
onto a PCB behind and beneath the folded metal fascia. He
said it had been loose for a while, but had now fallen in,
and wondered if it was a job he could sort himself.
When it happened, he was wise enough to unplug it and
not switch it on again. That’s good practice; the last thing
we would want is the magic smoke escaping. Though not a
tube amp, there is still serious voltage and current running
around inside there. He also gathered a nut and washer from
the socket that had fallen to the floor in front of the amp.
I told him to look at the top of the case. Obviously, there’s
a handle or two, but I am looking for the amp tray mounting screws, which are often on the top. He said he could
see four screws, one close to each corner, all with cupped
washers underneath.
I advised him to undo each one and remove it, but just
make sure with the last one that the amp wouldn’t just fall
away into the box (most are supported by timber battens,
and the amp tray slides out the back like a drawer, but it
still pays to be careful).
I also asked him to remove the speaker/output wiring
if it was connected via a plug. If it was hard-wired, there
should be enough cable to get the tray out far enough.
He got the screws out and slid the tray back until he could
see the socket. There was also an inside washer, which he
retrieved. He positioned the washer on the socket and put
the whole thing back into the fascia hole. I suggested he
hold the socket in with one hand while fitting the washer
and nut to the outside and tightening it the same way.
He had a crescent spanner (shifter) that opened enough
to fit it, so carefully cranked it tight, being cautious not to
overdo it. He slid the tray back in, aligned the screw holes
and buttoned it back up. He fired it up, tested it and all
was well. Another donation sent, and job done!
Flashing LED shop sign repair
Some time ago, a friend gave me a flashing LED shop sign.
The bottom row of blue LEDs no longer lit up, so they’d
replaced the sign with a different one. They would have
tossed it in the bin if they hadn’t known me.
I said I would have a look at it and see what was wrong
with it. The LEDs used in this sign are the ‘straw hat’ type,
which I did not have on hand. They are similar to regular
domed LEDs, but the lens is about half as tall.
The sign consists of a plastic frame with a front panel
made from MDF. The LEDs are just poked through the MDF,
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
the leads bent sideways and soldered to the leads of the adjacent LEDs. This is actually a commercially made sign from
in China, so I was surprised by this construction method.
I got my multimeter out and tested each LED in the bottom row, and I found that three LEDs were open circuit.
I found blue straw hat LEDs available from China via
eBay. I knew it would take a few weeks for the order to
arrive, but I wasn’t in any hurry, so I ordered a packet.
Unfortunately, they didn’t arrive for more than a month, so
I asked the seller to resend them. The re-sent order arrived
in two weeks.
The original order arrived 59 days after it was first sent.
I didn’t need the extra LEDs, but I didn’t want the seller to
lose on the deal, as they had been kind enough to re-send
the order for me when it hadn’t arrived, so I placed a second order and told them they didn’t need to actually send
another lot of LEDs.
After replacing the three dead LEDs, I powered the sign
up and I found that the bottom row of LEDs only lit faintly;
not at full brightness like the other blue LEDs in the top
row. So there must still be something wrong with one or
more of the remaining original LEDs.
I decided to replace the other 11 LEDs in the bottom
row, as I thought that would fix it and the LEDs were not
expensive. Anyway, I had way more than I needed with
the two lots arriving.
After replacing the remaining LEDs and taking care to orientate them correctly, I powered the sign up and it finally
worked correctly. The OPEN LEDs stay lit all the time,
while the red, green and blue LEDs at the top and bottom
of OPEN flash alternately.
The sign is powered by a small circuit on a PCB with
resistors in series with the LED chains. I could not see what
was on the circuit board, as it was stuck to the MDF with
what looks like hot-melt glue, and I didn’t want to disturb
it. Now that the sign was working correctly, I replaced the
back MDF panel, and it was ready to use again.
I don’t really have a use for this sign, but it was interesting to repair it and get it working again. At least I saved
the sign from landfill, even if I don’t need it. Perhaps my
friend will want it back eventually.
Bruce Pierson, Dundathu, Qld.
Two torch conversions
I will describe two torch conversions, the first being a
Click-brand nightlight/torch purchased from Bunnings,
with the second being an Eveready Dolphin unit.
1. Wireless Qi charging for the Click torch
Externally, the Click nightlight appears to be well made
with a durable white plastic case. It is normally held and
charged in a base unit that plugs into a power point. The
movement-activated nightlight illuminates the front panel
and it can also be used as a portable torch using LEDs at
the top. A button on the side switches through the various modes.
The battery is charged via a wireless transmitter and
receiver. After about 12 months, the charging failed. An
internet search found numerous reports of wireless transmitter failures with this model.
Opening the case of the base module showed burnt out
components exactly as per the internet reports. The circuit is mains-driven via a capacitor to drop the voltage.
The internals do not appear to have the insulation levels
or clearances expected for a 230V AC appliance.
Attempts to repair the circuit brought no success. I then
wondered whether it would be possible to retrofit a Qi wireless charger of the type that is commonly used to wirelessly
recharge mobile phones.
5W mini Qi receivers are available inexpensively online.
They comprise a rectangular receiver coil about 20 × 25
× 1mm attached to a small circuit board with Qi receiver
circuitry and a 3.7V Li-ion battery charge control chip.
I ordered three units for $15 including postage, and they
arrived after eight days. Fitting one was easy after removing
the original receiver coil and mounting plastic. I taped the
Servicing Stories Wanted
Do you have any good servicing stories that you would like
to share in The Serviceman column in SILICON CHIP? If so,
why not send those stories in to us? It doesn’t matter what
the story is about as long as it’s in some way related to the
electronics or electrical industries, to computers or even to
cars and similar.
We pay for all contributions published but please note that
your material must be original. Send your contribution by
email to: editor<at>siliconchip.com.au
Please be sure to include your full name and address details.
siliconchip.com.au
Australia's electronics magazine
December 2025 93
▶
Above: the wireless
charging setup for the Click
torch.
Right: the Eveready Dolphin torch Li-ion conversion. ▶
Qi coil underneath the torch circuit board exactly in the
middle of the unit, and fixed it with hot glue. The small
circuit board was glued in the position of the original coil
and the Bat + and Bat – battery charge terminals.
The circuit board has red and green LEDs to indicate
charging and end of charge, respectively. I drilled two 3mm
holes partway through the torch cover immediately above
the LED positions so that these indicators would be visible
when the unit was placed on the charger.
When reassembled, I placed the unit centrally over a Qi
charger plate and the charger LED indicated a successful
connection. On the torch, I was greeted with the red LED
indicating charging. After a short while, the red LED turned
green to indicate end of charge. The conversion has worked
perfectly with no more mains power risks.
2. Eveready Dolphin Torch Li-ion battery conversion,
Qi wireless charging & LED bulb
My classic old Dolphin torch used a 6V dry cell lantern
battery and an incandescent bulb. It had been unused for
some time because the battery was flat. I thought I would
upgrade its performance with a rechargeable battery, a
bright white LED bulb and wireless charging.
Because I already have several 18650 Li-ion cells removed
from a defunct laptop battery pack with reasonable capacity and a spare 5W mini Qi receiver module, I estimated I
could upgrade the torch for about 1/3 the price of a new 6V
lantern battery.
I only needed to purchase a P13.5S white LED bulb,
which is a direct drop-in replacement for the old incandescent bulb. They are available with several voltage and
power ratings. I chose the 3V ½W rating, connecting it in
series with a 15W ½W resistor to limit the current from the
battery. The resulting LED power is less than 1/4W but its
brightness is exceptional.
With this arrangement, it draws about 80mA from the
battery, which should give over 12 hours of battery life.
Prior to installation, I extended the wires between the
charge receiver coil and circuit board to make it easier to
locate the circuit board in a position where the charge LEDs
would be visible through the plastic casing. Unfortunately,
my Dolphin casing is red colour, so the green LED would
look very dim through the case. To solve this, I drilled a
5mm hole so the LEDs would be visible.
I fitted the battery to an 18650 single-cell holder and used
two nylon cable ties to strap it to the bulb holder assembly.
Next, I used a strip of PVC electrical tape to position the
94
Silicon Chip
charge receiver coil on the inside bottom of the torch base,
close to the torch’s centre of gravity and with the coil facing
downwards. I secured it with hot-melt glue at each corner.
I then the hot-glued the circuit board alongside the torch
on/off switch in a position where the green LED aligned
with the previously drilled hole, and covered the hole
with a dob of hot glue to preserve the waterproofing. The
remainder of the wiring was simple.
Both torches are now fully functional, with the added
convenience of wireless charging.
Phillip Webb, Hope Valley, SA.
A rock amplifier
I have contributed several stories to this column about
repairing powered speakers. This time it is something different, a guitar amplifier. Many guitar amplifiers are nothing more than a powered speaker with a built-in preamplifier to suit a guitar, but not the one I will describe here.
This amplifier has a guitar input feeding a conventional
preamp stage to get the signal to a suitable level, but it is
then fed into a dual analog-to-digital converter (ADC). It
then feeds two digital signal processor (DSP) chips, which
can alter the tone or add effects such as delay and modulation. If the processing is different on each channel, the
resulting outputs will form a stereo signal.
The DSP chips are controlled by a microcontroller that
adjusts their parameters. These parameters can be saved by
the micro into a patch, which can be recalled at the push
of a button. This model can store 32 different patches or
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
total setups of all the panel controls. The DSP also allows
the amplifier to emulate the sound of 12 classic guitar
amplifiers.
The outputs of the DSPs are fed to two digital-to-analog
converters (DACs) to turn the signals back into analog audio.
From there, the audio goes to two sets of send/return jack
sockets on the back panel. These allow the user to break
into the signal chain to add more processing if desired.
These turned out to be very helpful with the repair.
The returns from these jacks then go to two 60W power
amplifiers, each driving their own speakers. These power
amplifiers are very unconventional. The manufacturer calls
them “Valve Reactor Power Amplifiers”. Each channel contains one ECC83 twin-triode valve.
There are many solid-state guitar amplifiers that have
one or more valves in the preamp, but this is different.
It has always been my opinion that the desired harmonically rich valve sound only comes from a valve push-pull
amplifier with an output transformer. Single-ended valve
amplifiers have a different sound.
To this end, this amplifier has a valve running in pushpull into an output transformer with a power output of
about 1W. Following the output transformers is a master
volume control that allows the user to have the valve stage
running into distortion, but with a lower ultimate sound
level. From there, the signal is boosted by the two 60W
solid-state amplifiers.
Another feature of the Valve Reactor Stage is an extra
cathode resistor, which can be switched in by a CMOS
switch, allowing the user to run the valves in Class-A or
Class-AB to mimic different classic amplifiers.
The fault with this amplifier was “it just doesn’t sound
right”. Further inspection revealed one output channel was
not working, which made all the stereo effects sound odd.
The send and return jacks allowed me to verify that the
preamp and DSP sections were working correctly, but one
of the power amps was not. There is another pair of jacks
labelled Line Out (left and right), which are connected to
the output transformers. The left Line Out jack had no output, so the fault was in the Valve Reactor Stage.
This did not please me because it was difficult to get to
in the chassis. I was able to probe the pins of the valves and
determined one was getting a signal and the other was not.
In a valve amplifier, the output valves are driven by a
phase inverter stage, which normally consists of another
dual-triode valve. This stage provides two signals with
opposing phases to drive each output valve. In this amplifier, this function is carried out by two FETs.
I was able to find two resistors that connect the FET drain
terminals to HT. The junction of these feeds the audio via
capacitors to the grids of the output valve. The voltages on
both these junctions were very low, just a few volts, where
I was expecting something greater than 100V.
Two resistors form a divider from HT to ground to bias
both FETs, and the voltage at their junction seemed wrong.
Measuring both resistors showed that one was open-circuit,
and the reason was obvious; it was covered in glue. This
will limit its ability to dissipate heat, and was also turning
the leads green with corrosion.
A new resistor (R111) had the amplifier singing once
again. It can be seen in the photo to the right of the two
large electrolytic capacitors.
SC
Paul Mallon, Christchurch, New Zealand.
siliconchip.com.au
Australia's electronics magazine
December 2025 95
Vintage Electronics
The BC-221 US-Military Frequency
Meter from 1941
Domestic valve radios
were calibrated at the
factory and might be
tweaked occasionally
during service. But
military radios operate
in rough conditions, out
in the field, and need to
tune accurately across
thousands of channels.
How were they kept in
calibration? The BC-221
was the secret weapon.
By Ian Batty
W
orking on VHF and UHF aircraft
radios back in my RAAF days
in the mid-1960s was simple. Everything operated at defined channel frequencies and was crystal-controlled.
The crew needed only to switch to the
appropriate channel, and the equipment would do the rest.
This demanded one crystal unit
per channel in both the receiver and
transmitter; a total of 16 in the eight-
channel American AN/ARC-3, and 44
in the British TR16440!
Even by the 1960s, crystals were
still expensive and labour-intensive
to produce. During WWII, millions
would have been needed for the many
tens of thousands of military radios of
all kinds.
Up until the late 1940s, equipment as diverse as the United States’
Marines TBY Squad Radio (September
2020; siliconchip.au/Article/14580)
and the British Wireless Set No. 38
MkIII used a calibration-frequency
96
Silicon Chip
crystal oscillator to provide ‘markers’
at specific intervals over the operational band.
The SCR-274 “Command” sets,
working at HF, used a single crystal in
each tuneable transmitter, which, in
concert with a ‘Magic Eye’ tube, confirmed the calibration at one point in
the operating band.
This was far from ideal, though.
Firstly, the HF band spans 3-30MHz,
with the range of around 3-15MHz
most commonly used. Allowing 1kHz
channel spacing, that demands around
12,000 channels. The famous SCR536/
BC611 “handietalkie” used any one of
50 crystal-controlled channels in its
allocated band of 3.6~6MHz, but had
to be returned to a depot to change
channels.
So, general-purpose HF transmitters, receivers and transmitter-
receivers, such as our Wireless Set No.
19, could only be continuously tuned.
Few of these sets provided any internal
Australia's electronics magazine
calibration, so operators were in the
position of ‘set and hope’.
Sets were routinely brought back to
company headquarters, field depots,
or major repair centres, so it was possible to provide frequency calibration
then. But we still have the problem
of about 12,000 possible frequency
allocations.
The solution was to provide a highly
accurate and stable signal generator/
receiver with a detailed calibration
chart. This would give technicians a
reference that was accurate to a few
hundred hertz when calibrated against
its own internal crystal oscillator.
The SCR-211/BC-221
The BC-221 Frequency Meter (BC
= Basic Component) was a part of the
SCR-211 parent set (SCR = Set, Complete Radio). Interestingly, in this case,
it was the only part of that set. Still,
the Meter itself is the BC-221, not the
SCR-211. The SCR/BC system was
siliconchip.com.au
ultimately replaced by the JETDS system in 1943, but the BC-221 was never
allocated a JETDS designator.
The BC-221 comprises a variable-
frequency oscillator for setting reference frequencies, a heterodyne
demodulator for measuring transmitter frequencies, and a crystal calibrator
for setting either its own calibration,
or that of external equipment.
The Technical Manual for the initial -A, -B and -C types of the BC-221
is dated 1941, while the definitive TM
11-300 of 1944 lists 25 variants.
The instrument was made in the
tens of thousands, and was also made
by countries other than the USA –
Louis Muelstee’s Wireless For The
Warrior website has a Russian example (www.wftw.nl/russian221.html).
The BC-221 was used right down at
field level, not just in depots, thanks to
it being compact and battery-powered.
It was designed to be carried by radio
operators, technicians and small unit
signal sections, so they could keep
their sets on-frequency without having
to ship them back to a depot.
The box is built like a brick, with
shock-resistant mounts, big batteries,
and the headphones-plug-as-power-
switch trick to conserve them. By
consulting the calibration book and
zero-beating against the internal crystal, an operator in a forward area could
check his transmitter or receiver on
the spot.
That said, depots and workshops
did use them too, for aligning radios
after major repairs, or as a reference
when producing training or calibration manuals. In practice, company
headquarters/field workshops would
have at least one. Frontline signal
units often carried one so their radios
could be set and kept in tolerance.
Higher-level maintenance depots had
them in larger numbers for mass calibration.
The BC-221 has two ranges, Low
Band (125~250kHz) and High Band
(2~4MHz). Each instrument was individually calibrated, with an extensive
custom calibration book, bound inside
the lid of the case inside the front
cover. The Low Band has a calibration point every 100Hz, while the High
Band has points at 1kHz spacings.
Setting its output frequency to a precision of 100Hz (on the Low Band) or
1kHz (on the High Band) is done using
a master dial drum (visible through
a window) and a rotary vernier dial.
siliconchip.com.au
The manual also shows how to
measure frequencies between
the indicated values. Thus,
within the instrument’s limits of calibration, it would be
possible to tune a transmitter
to 8.130MHz, midway between
the chart listings of 8.128MHz
and 8.132MHz.
Although the oscillator is
extremely frequency-stable, its
Class-C operation makes its output rich in harmonics. Given its
fundamental frequency ranges of
125~250kHz and 2~4MHz, the
BC-221’s useful ranges extend
from 125kHz to 2MHz (fundamental, 2nd, 4th and 8th harmonics) on the Low Band and
2MHz to 20MHz (fundamental,
2nd, 4th and 5th harmonics) on
the High Band.
The spectrum sweep in Scope
1 shows the harmonic output for
a dial setting of 2MHz. Likewise,
the internal reference crystal
oscillator’s output is rich in harmonics, ensuring checkpoints
beyond 20MHz.
The expanded view of the
frequency meter. This version
used a timber cabinet, but
there are also some that have
an aluminium-alloy cabinet.
Scope 1: both oscillators
(the primary and crystal
ones) have significant
harmonics in their output,
as shown here. This is not
a flaw but in fact a useful
feature, since you can use
the harmonics to tune a
radio to a multiple of the
selected frequency.
Why good radios are so important for militaries
The battle of Port Arthur/Tsushima in 1905 saw the Japanese Fleet destroy or
capture all eleven battleships of the opposing Russian Second Pacific Squadron. How was it possible for the Japanese, who had acquired their first warship less than 50 years previously, to defeat the Russians, with a naval fighting
history reaching back to 1696?
Both fleets were equipped with Morse code equipment, but the Japanese
gear was locally designed, technically superior, more reliable, and used to much
greater effect due to thorough operator training at the Yokosuka Training School.
So radios can play a decisive role in armed conflict, but only if they are reliable and operated effectively. You need to know what channel or frequency
to use to get that communication happening, hence the need for calibration.
Australia's electronics magazine
December 2025 97
Side views of the BC-211 frequency
meter. There were as many as 25
different BC-211 models, each with
slight variations to the circuit.
Automatic
calibration in the 1940s
The method used to generate
the custom calibration book for each
set is most surprising, because it was
done by computer – in the early 1940s!
Engineers at the Philco Corporation Research Division, Engineering
Department created an automatic calibration computer for this task using
126 valves. The BC-221 was calibrated by noting the dial reading for
internal heterodyne beats and calculating how many cycles per dial division it was from the previous calibration point.
The computer consisted of an automatic calibrator combined with an
adding machine (semi-automatic),
which recorded the calibration data at
327 points, interpolated between those
points, and automatically printed the
3252 different frequency value numbers in each individual calibration
book.
The time to do all this was 6.5 hours;
the actual printing of the values in
the book took just 16 minutes. The
time for an experienced human to do
the work manually, in contrast, was
averaged at 16 hours per frequency
meter. A mechanical hand automatically turned the dial of the BC-221 to
various predetermined settings while
measurements were underway.
The calculations were carried out
It’s interesting to note the arrangement of the chassis (shown from the rear),
with the separate boards and the valves placed at different angles.
98
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
by automated complex adding machines of the type then
used by banks and finance companies, and the results printed in
the calibration book and also saved
on paper tape. The adding machines
were fitted with solenoids to depress
the keys; the valves the computer used
were mainly 0A4G cold-cathode thyratrons, similar in function to a modern bistable flip-flop.
This description of the calibration
was based on information from the
webpage at https://jproc.ca/ve3fab/
bc221.html
Operating principle
Most modern devices that require
precise high-frequency signals generate them using phase-locked loop
(PLL) circuits. A master oscillator
(MO) operates at a fixed frequency
and feeds one input of a phase comparator. The phase comparator’s other
input is fed by the output of a voltage-
controlled, variable-frequency oscillator (VCO) via a frequency divider
(usually a programmable one).
The VCO’s frequency is controlled
by the phase comparator’s DC output. If the phase comparator detects
a difference between its inputs (VCO
and divider), it will ‘steer’ the oscillator until its two frequency inputs are
equal. In practice, the VCO will be
forced to be in phase with the divider’s output.
This is a servo system, similar to
how a car’s cruise control can maintain
the set speed, even when going uphill.
In this case, the “servo” is providing
an accurate, fixed frequency, using a
reference and frequency divider.
siliconchip.com.au
The top
view of
the chassis,
showing
the master
dial drum
at the
bottom.
an external transmitter signal or the
internal crystal reference.
As you tune the BC-221, you hear
a beat tone in the headphones. When
the beat tone slows to zero, the VFO
and the reference signal are at the same
frequency.
So, with the BC-221, you sense the
difference between the BC-221’s frequency and that of the incoming signal. Instead of an automatic control
loop as in the homodyne, the operator
listens for the beat note and dials the
oscillator until the difference can no
longer be perceived.
This manual zero-beating method
was simple, reliable, and accurate
enough that with the aid of the calibration book, operators could set or
measure frequencies to within a few
hundred hertz, more than sufficient
for wartime communications.
Accuracy
To change frequency, the divider
is simply commanded to a different
division ratio. The division ratio of
the divider, through negative feedback, becomes the frequency multiplication factor.
While “PLL” is a modern term, the
principle goes back to 1924 as the
homodyne (“same power”) system,
in contrast to Armstrong’s heterodyne
(“different power”).
If we heterodyne an AM signal with
a pure sinewave of the same frequency
(eg, the output of a PLL locked to the
carrier), we have a superhet with an
intermediate frequency (IF) of 0Hz –
all that would be left is the modulation! This type of circuit appeared as
early as 1924 as the homodyne, and
later as the synchrodyne in Electronics Australia, June 1975.
The original homodyne used a
weakly oscillating circuit that would
‘pull in’ to an incoming signal of sufficient strength and synchronise to it.
Connect a pair of headphones to the
valve’s anode lead and off you go.
This circuit demonstrated the
‘lock-in’ principle but, since it used
a filter to create the control voltage,
it was an automatic frequency control (AFC) system, rather than a true
PLL. Similar techniques would be
widely used in FM tuners before
the ready availability of integrated-
circuit PLLs.
The generic homodyne circuit in
Fig.1 shows just one tuning component: C1 tunes the oscillator into its
siliconchip.com.au
‘capture’ range, and the control voltage does the rest. As the homodyne/
synchrodyne converts directly at the
incoming carrier frequency (‘direct
conversion’), it offers a frequency
response from essentially DC to some
upper limit set only by the filter that
follows the demodulator.
In a homodyne or synchrodyne
receiver, the local oscillator is automatically pulled into lock with the
incoming signal when the frequencies
are close. When that happens, the two
are at the same frequency and the audible ‘beat note’ disappears.
The BC-221 uses a related principle, but instead of locking, it relies on
manual adjustments by the operator.
The instrument’s variable-frequency
oscillator (VFO) is mixed with either
The instrument is highly precise;
the following lists the maximum frequency error expected due to each
source of imprecision:
1. Small shocks (caused by handling, and the thrust on the dial and
pressure on the panel when using the
equipment): 100 cycles maximum
2. The action of locking the dial: 30
cycles maximum
3. Warming up: 100 cycles maximum
4. Changing of load on the antenna
post: 50 cycles maximum
5. A drop of 10% in battery voltage
or a change of 5°C in the surrounding
temperature: 325 cycles maximum
6. Error in calibration: 500 cycles
maximum
7. Error in crystal frequency: 250
cycles maximum
Fig.1: the general concept of a homodyne. Once tuned close to the input signal
frequency, the oscillator will ‘lock on’ to it. The output of the mixer is therefore
just the modulation signal, with the carrier removed entirely.
December 2025 99
Total error: 1355 cycles maximum
or 0.034% at 4000 kc.
The manual notes that “Actual tests
show that the maximum errors can be
assumed no greater than 50% of the
values given…”
In practice, it’s also unlikely that all
errors would sum in the same direction. The manual notes that the maximum errors will occur at a frequency
of 4MHz and a temperature of -30°C (!).
Robert Watson-Watt’s dictum, “Give
them the third-best to get on with. Second best takes too long and the best
never comes”. That approach provided
the radar systems that won the Battle
of Britain in 1940.
But who doesn’t love going down
the rabbit hole? Using an atomic clock
reference (the carrier of 774 ABC Melbourne), it is accurate to well under
100 millihertz (0.1Hz). My HP 8656B
signal generator came in 4Hz high, and
Power supply
all following figures are quoted relative
The instrument was designed to corrected figures on the HP.
for battery operation. Four series-
On power-up after who-knowsconnected “Number 6” cells supplied how-many-years, with the recomthe 6V valve heaters, while six 22.5V mended supply voltage and after a
BA-2 batteries in series supplied the few minutes of warming up, the crys135V HT.
tal oscillator came in at 1,000,002Hz
I found that -0.5V and +0.5V changes (1.000002MHz), a +2ppm error. Surin heater voltage gave a frequency error prisingly, during the performance
of -33Hz and -2Hz, respectively, at measurement process, it settled to
2MHz, while a drop from 135V to 1,000,017Hz, an increase to +17ppm.
100V HT caused an increase of 146Hz Still, not bad after 70+ years.
at 2MHz.
To measure that tiny 2Hz error, I just
It’s easy to get lost in the Jungle of set my BC-211 to exactly 1kHz above
Excess Precision – it’s where you chase the reference frequency and sent the
down some parameter to the point of resulting audio tone to my frequency
undetectablity. I’m reminded of Sir counter. This indicated 983Hz and
998Hz. Subtracting my 1kHz offset
gave the -17Hz/-2Hz results. I checked
my counter’s calibration as part of the
exercise, so I’m OK with claiming my
998Hz measurement.
Circuit details
Components in the circuit (Fig.2)
are numbered in order (with sub-
numbering when values are shared):
the capacitors are #1 to #10-3, resistors
are #20-1 to #26, with minor components filling the gaps to #36. The valves
are not numbered.
Confusingly, the -A circuit shows
the variable oscillator with the screen
grid enclosing the control grid, and
shows a pentode with four grids! This
is an erroneous symbology dating from
the early days of circuit diagrams. In
reality, the ‘77 is a conventional triple-
grid pentode, with its first (control)
grid connected to the band switch and
main tuning capacitor. The -B circuit
is correct.
The VFO, a VT77/‘77 in the initial
issue, or a VT116/6SJ7 in later versions, operates as a cathode-coupled
Hartley oscillator. The cathode con-
Fig.2: the BC-221-C and -D circuit looks deceptively simple, but this instrument has been carefully designed to minimise
drift so that after factory calibration, it will remain very accurate in field service. You just need to refer to the calibration
booklet attached to the unit to tune it to just about any frequency.
100
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
Fig.3: this shows how accurately my unit tracked despite its age. Compare the green and dark blue curves to see the
benefit of calibration.
nects to a tap on the selected tuning
coil, and feedback to the grid is taken
from the top of the coil. Unusually,
there’s no grid bias resistor, and the
grid returns to DC ground; the circuit
uses cathode bias via resistors #20-2/
#22-2 (5kW/10kW).
The circuit is tuned by main capacitor #1 (150pF). There is an individual trimmer for the top end of each
band (#3, #4), and a master Corrector trimmer #2 mounted on the front
panel.
The RF output is taken from the
oscillator’s anode; this is electron coupling, ensuring that any changes in the
output circuit do not affect the oscillator’s frequency stability. The oscillator output connects to the antenna
terminal and also the grid of the heterodyne detector, a 6A7 pentagrid or
a VT167/6K8 triode-hexode.
The antenna connection allows the
set to operate as a low-power signal
generator for receiver calibration. As
the oscillator is not modulated, exact
receiver adjustment is easiest done by
calibrating a tuneable transmitter to
match a frequency set on the BC-211,
then tuning the receiver to the calibrated transmitter. The BC-211 manual details this method in paragraph
11, on page 6 (a link to this is under
the References cross-heading).
The 6A7/VT167/6K8 converter
operates in one of three modes:
a. as a direct heterodyne comparator
of an incoming transmitter signal and
the local VFO
b. as a 1MHz ‘marker’ generator for
calibrating external equipment
siliconchip.com.au
c. as a 1MHz ‘marker’ generator for
calibrating the BC-221 itself
The converter’s anode feeds the
audio amplifier, a VT76/’76 in the -A
issue, or a VT116/6SJ7 afterwards.
This amplifies the converter’s heterodyne output to drive external headphones.
As a final nice touch, you have to
plug the ‘phones in to apply power
to the heater circuit. As you have to
remove the headphone jack to close
the case, battery life would be preserved during transport even if the
power switch was left on.
How good is it?
It is outstanding, as you can see
from Fig.3. For equipment that’s been
unused for decades to come in with
its calibrator only 17ppm
high is outstanding. Its
only limitation is the
lack of a modulator for
the VFO – this would
have made it easier
to use when lining up
receivers.
It’s capable of very
high accuracy once calibrated, but, as my ‘as
found’ results show, you
can just check the chart
for the frequency you want, dial up
and off you go.
The dial uses vernier graduations.
This scheme allows accurate dial-
setting to within one-tenth of a minor
division without the burden of reading
minuscule engravings. The handbook
shows clearly how to do this.
References
TM 11-300 (1944 issue); which
counts as the BC-211 (SCR-211) manual: www.qsl.net/zl1bpu/IONO/TM11300.pdf
The original 1944 article on automated calibration: siliconchip.au/
link/ac94 (see pages 96~107).
For a brief description: https://jproc.
SC
ca/ve3fab/bc221.html
The underside view of the
chassis. The cabling is
tied with a continuous
run of waxed
string, known as
“looming”.
101
ASK SILICON CHIP
Got a technical problem? Can’t understand a piece of jargon or some technical principle? Drop us a line
and we’ll answer your question. Send your email to silicon<at>siliconchip.com.au
Digital Preamp
crossover capabilities
I was surprised and excited to see
the article on the Digital Preamplifier
in the October 2025 issue (siliconchip.
au/Series/449). I have read it several
times and am looking forward to the
next articles. Of what DSP and crossovers is it capable?
My current system uses four-way
active speakers with a miniDSP Flex8
and 48dB/octave crossovers at 100Hz,
800Hz and 4kHz. Is there any baffle
step compensation, and frequency and
gain presets? (F. C., Kelso, Tas)
● Phil Prosser responds: it has four
stereo outputs and the digital crossovers can be configured for 6dB/
octave, 12dB/octave, 24dB/octave or
48dB/octave. Each has a programmable frequency from 5Hz to 20kHz, a
programmable delay on each output
in 1.7mm increments and the option
for phase inversion on each channel.
It can also convert stereo to mono for
the subwoofer output.
Each channel has programmable
attenuation from 0dB to 20dB in 0.5dB
increments. There is a three-band parametric EQ that applies to all channels
(on the input prior to crossover). The
centre frequencies can vary from 5Hz
to 20kHz, Q from 0.1 to 10, with a gain
range of at least ±10dB. There’s also a
separate three-channel parametric EQ
on each channel.
The device’s sampling rate is
192kSa/s. The ADC and DAC are all
24-bit devices, with all processing
done as 32 or 64 bits.
From what you describe, it should
cover your needs. I have not chosen to
put in FIR filtering; a user could do this
if they wanted, but there would be a
fair amount of programming involved.
Baffle step correction is very dependent on the speaker you are tuning. I
usually deal with that using the parametric EQ if it is even distinguishable
in the measurements.
The EQ calculations in the software have a shelving EQ capability,
so adding a baffle step correction
102
Silicon Chip
feature would ‘just’ require expanding the user interface and configuration storage.
Alternative Li-ion cell
for USB Power Monitor
I have been unable to find a supplier
in New Zealand with an exact equivalent to the lithium-ion cell specified
for the USB-C Power Monitor (August
& September 2025; siliconchip.au/
Series/445). Stockists in Australia
who will supply NZ customers cannot supply the cell to NZ because of
safety regulations.
A New Zealand stockist of lithium cells has a 3.7V 380mAh Li-Po
rechargeable cell measuring 40 × 20
× 8mm. The dimensions of the cell
specified for the project are 38 × 25
× 6mm. It appears that the thickness
difference of an additional 2mm is the
only possible obstacle against using
this cell. Will such a cell fit in the
USB-C Power Monitor? (J. W., Auckland, New Zealand)
● Based on our measurements,
there should be just enough space for
an 8mm-thick cell. There is 15mm
available between the bottom of the
case and the back of the PCB. If we
allow 2mm for the components on the
back of the PCB (in the space between
the PIC and the LED) and 4mm for
the second PCB, that leaves 9mm for
the cell.
There is about 44mm of horizontal
space between the PIC and the LED,
so the longer length of the cell is not
a problem.
Setting up WiFi on the
Big Clock
I have built the BIG LED Clock from
the January 2025 issue (siliconchip.au/
Article/17603) and would like some
help with getting the clock to work. I
don’t know what to do about the WiFi
credentials at the top of the sketch. I
can’t see any reference to the WiFi. I
assume the Arduino can connect to
Australia's electronics magazine
my mobile phone, tablet or PC. (J. P.,
Port Augusta, SA)
● The credentials are set at lines 2
and 3 of the code, which initially read:
#define SSID “****”
#define PASS “****”
The SSID is the network name, so
you should change the **** to match
the name of your network, keeping
the quote marks. Similarly, PASS is
the network’s password.
For example, if your WiFi network is
called John’s WiFi and the password is
12345678, you would change these to:
#define SSID “John’s WiFi”
#define PASS “12345678”
Then upload the modified sketch
and it should automatically connect
to the WiFi network.
SMD Test Tweezers no
longer power up
Probably three or more years ago,
I purchased two of the original SMD
Test Tweezers kits (October 2021;
siliconchip.au/Article/15057). They
worked great at the time, and were a
useful adjunct to my workbench.
I hadn’t used them for quite a while
(possibly 8-12 months). I went to use
one today, only to find it dead. Of
course, the CR2032 cell was flat, so I
replaced it, but it still wouldn’t power
on. I then got out the second one and
replaced its cell with the same result.
I have checked that power is getting to the circuit on both boards, but
I am unable to get them to work. The
screens do not light up at all and nothing is displayed on them. I checked the
voltage across the probe tips, which
reads close to the cell voltage and goes
to zero when shorted. Have you heard
of this happening before?
Is this likely to be the PIC chip and,
if so, if I purchased a couple of the
newer, pre-programmed version PIC
16F15214 chips, would I just be able
to replace the old ones with them and
continued on page 104
siliconchip.com.au
MARKET CENTRE
Advertise your product or services here in Silicon Chip
KIT ASSEMBLY & REPAIR
FOR SALE
DAVE THOMPSON
(the Serviceman from
Silicon Chip) is available to help you with
kit assembly, project
troubleshooting, general electronics and
custom design work.
No job too small. Based in Christchurch,
New Zealand, but service available Australia/NZ wide.
Email dave<at>davethompson.co.nz
LEDsales
KEITH RIPPON KIT ASSEMBLY &
REPAIR:
* Australia & New Zealand;
* Small production runs.
Phone Keith: 0409 662 794
keith.rippon<at>gmail.com
PCB PRODUCTION
PCB MANUFACTURE: single to multilayer. Bare board tested. One-offs to
any quantity. 48 hour service. Artwork
design. Excellent prices. Check out our
specials: www.ldelectronics.com.au
USB-C Power Monitor
August-September 2025
LEDS, BRAND NAME AND GENERIC
LEDs, filament LEDs, LED drivers,
heatsinks, power supplies, kits and
modules, components, breadboards,
hardware, magnets. Please visit www.
ledsales.com.au
PMD WAY offers (almost) everything
for the electronics enthusiast – with
full warranty, technical support and free
delivery worldwide. Visit pmdway.com
to get started.
Short-Form Kit
SC7489: $60
siliconchip.au/Series/445
This kit includes all non-optional parts, except
the case, lithium-ion cell and glue. It does
include the FFC (flat flexible cable) PCB.
OATLEY ELECTRONICS HAS CEASED
NORMAL OPERATION. We have a huge
number of components including LED
modules, LED assemblies, valves, small
solar panels, small stepper motors etc to
sell at great prices. For more info or an
inspection (near Woy Woy, NSW Central
Coast) call Branko – 0428 600 036
ADVERTISING IN MARKET CENTRE
Classified Ad Rates: $32.00 for up to 20 words (punctuation not charged) plus $1.20 for each additional word. Display ads in
Market Centre (minimum 2cm deep, maximum 10cm deep): $82.50 per column centimetre per insertion. All prices include GST.
Closing date: 5 weeks prior to month of sale. To book, email the text to silicon<at>siliconchip.com.au and include your name, address
& credit card details, or phone (02) 9939 3295.
WARNING!
Silicon Chip magazine regularly describes projects which employ a mains power supply or produce high voltage. All such projects
should be considered dangerous or even lethal if not used safely. Readers are warned that high voltage wiring should be carried
out according to the instructions in the articles.
When working on these projects use extreme care to ensure that you do not accidentally come into contact with mains AC
voltages or high voltage DC. If you are not confident about working with projects employing mains voltages or other high voltages,
you are advised not to attempt work on them. Silicon Chip Publications Pty Ltd disclaims any liability for damages should anyone
be killed or injured while working on a project or circuit described in any issue of Silicon Chip magazine.
Devices or circuits described in Silicon Chip may be covered by patents. Silicon Chip disclaims any liability for the infringement of such patents by the manufacturing or selling of any such equipment. Silicon Chip also disclaims any liability for projects
which are used in such a way as to infringe relevant government regulations and by-laws.
Advertisers are warned that they are responsible for the content of all advertisements and that they must conform to the Competition & Consumer Act 2010 or as subsequently amended and to any governmental regulations which are applicable.
siliconchip.com.au
Australia's electronics magazine
December 2025 103
Advertising Index
Altronics.....................37-40, 59, 69
Blackmagic Design....................... 5
Dave Thompson........................ 103
Emona Instruments.................. IBC
Hare & Forbes............................... 9
Jaycar............................. IFC, 11-14
Keith Rippon Kit Assembly....... 103
LD Electronics........................... 103
LEDsales................................... 103
Microchip Technology.............OBC
Mouser Electronics....................... 3
Oatley Electronics..................... 103
OurPCB Australia.......................... 8
PCBWay......................................... 7
PMD Way................................... 103
SC Christmas Decorations......... 51
SC HiFi Headphone Amp............ 36
SC USB-C Power Monitor......... 103
Silicon Chip Back Issues........... 36
Silicon Chip PDFs on USB......... 78
Silicon Chip Shop...................... 15
The Loudspeaker Kit.com............ 6
Wagner Electronics..................... 95
Errata and on-sale date
Digital Preamplifier part one,
October 2025: in Fig.3 on page
34, the pins of IC7b and IC8b
are swapped. The upper pin of
each should be pin 5 (+) and the
lower pin should be pin 6 (-). The
connections of the other op amps
in the circuit are correct.
Serviceman’s Log, October 2025:
the photo at lower left on page 89
is of the wrong computer; it is an
Acer, not a Toshiba P750.
Next Issue: the January 2026 issue
is due on sale in newsagents by
Monday, December 29th. Expect
postal delivery of subscription
copies in Australia between
December 29th and January 14th.
104
Silicon Chip
go from there, or do you think it may
be something else? (E. W., Denistone,
NSW)
● We have not heard of this situation before, where the Tweezers
worked and then suddenly stopped. It
could be the microcontroller, but we
also suspect the OLED module, since
they can be quite delicate.
We have had reports of readers fitting the cell upside-down and thus
flattening it, but if you are getting
power to the circuit, that is not likely
to be the case.
One way to tell if it is the microcontroller or OLED at fault would be to see
if there are signals getting to the SDA
or SCL pins on the display. An oscilloscope should show activity several
times per second. We have also used a
piezo transducer to ‘listen in’ to data at
times, so if you don’t have an oscilloscope, try connecting one temporarily
between those pins and GND.
If you detect some traffic, that means
the PIC is probably OK and the OLED
screen may be faulty. If there is no
traffic, we would suspect the microcontroller.
Another thing worth trying is to
reset the micro by briefly shorting pins
1 and 3 of the ICSP header (CON1), taking MCLR to ground. That might force
the microcontroller to re-initialise the
OLED, in case the two are out of sync.
Alternative switch for
Signal Tracer
The Audio Signal Injector & Tracer
project (June 2015; siliconchip.au/
Article/8603) lists a DP4T slide switch
from element14. This switch is no longer made. Can you suggest a replacement? (E. M., Capel, WA)
● Altronics Cat SX2040 is a suitable
alternative (www.altronics.com.au/p/
sx2040-dp4t-pcb-mount-miniatureslide-switch).
Fixing Playmaster
amplifiers
In the late 1990s, I bought kits for
the Playmaster Series 4 preamplifier,
Playmaster 300W Subwoofer Amplifier and three of the Jaycar Playmaster Pro Series 3 Power Amplifier from
Jaycar in Clayton, Melbourne.
I recently replaced the four electrolytic capacitors in the Pro Series 3
Power Amplifiers after noticing odd
behaviour in the sound. The capacitors
Australia's electronics magazine
were leaking and needed replacement.
I sourced replacement capacitors from
Jaycar in North Lakes, Queensland.
Yesterday, I had another setback.
It appears the 300W Subwoofer had
a catastrophic failure of the power
amplifier Mosfets. Unfortunately, it
took out the connected subwoofer as
well. I have not yet disassembled the
amplifier.
Since I do not have the assembly
instructions anymore, can you provide the assembly instructions and circuit diagrams? As I recall, the instructions had various voltage check test
points documented in the instructions.
Do you have or know of a source of
replacement Mosfets?
I have really enjoyed the setup in my
office with this equipment and would
like to continue use if possible. (S. W.,
North Brisbane, Qld)
● We don’t have access to Jaycar’s
kit instructions, and after around 30
years, we doubt they would still have
them. They would have been based
on the articles published in Electronics Australia: December 1996 & January 1997 for the Series 4 preamplifier,
April & May 1995 for the 300W Subwoofer and February & March 1994
for the Pro Series 3 Power Amplifier.
Scans of these articles are available
from our website for the preamp:
siliconchip.au/Shop/15/3980
siliconchip.au/Shop/15/3981
And for the subwoofer:
siliconchip.au/Shop/15/3244
siliconchip.au/Shop/15/3441
Lastly, the power amplifier:
siliconchip.au/Shop/15/6640
siliconchip.au/Shop/15/6641
Replacement Mosfets are available
from Jaycar (N-channel) and DigiKey
(P-channel). There are other suppliers if you search for the parts online:
www.jaycar.com.au/p/ZT2460
www.digikey.com.au/en/products/
detail/2SJ162-E/1244174
There appear to be three Mosfets
for each half of the amplifier, so you
will need three 2SK1058s and three
2SJ162s. Check the circuits for anything else you may need before ordering anything. Since you will have to
back-order the 2SJ162s, we suggest
you do that first. The estimated delivery date is early next year. The manufacturer will stop making 2SJ162s in
March 2026.
Be careful ordering the 2SJ162s from
other stores as there appear to be counSC
terfeits on the market.
siliconchip.com.au
“Rigol Offer Australia’s Best
Value Test Instruments”
New
2026
Products
Oscilloscopes
New
12Bit
Scopes
New
Up To
13GHz
RIGOL DS-1000Z/E - FREE OPTIONS
RIGOL DHO/MHO Series
RIGOL DSO-8000/A Series
450MHz to 200MHz, 2/4 Ch
41GS/s Real Time Sampling
424Mpts Standard Memory Depth
470MHz to 800MHz, 2/4 Ch
412Bit Vertical Resolution
4Ultra Low Noise Floor
4600MHz to 13GHz, 4Ch
410GS/s to 40GS/s Real Time Sampling
4Up to 4Gpts Memory Depth
FROM $
649
FROM $
ex GST
684
FROM $
ex GST
13,191
Multimeters
Function/Arbitrary Function Generators
RIGOL DG-800/900 Pro Series
RIGOL DG-1000Z Series
RIGOL DM-858/E
425MHz to 200MHz, 1/2 Ch
416Bit, Up to 1.25GS/s
47” Colour Touch Screen
425MHz, 30MHz & 60MHz
42 Output Channels
4160 In-Built Waveforms
45 1/2 Digits
47” Colour Touch Screen
4USB & LAN
FROM $
713
FROM $
ex GST
Power Supplies
ex GST
604
FROM $
ex GST
Spectrum Analysers
632
ex GST
Real-Time Analysers
New
Up To
26.5GHz
RIGOL DP-932E
RIGOL DSA Series
RIGOL RSA Series
4Triple Output 2 x 32V/3A & 6V/3A
43 Electrically Isolated Channels
4Internal Series/Parallel Operation
4500MHz to 7.5GHz
4RBW settable down to 10 Hz
4Optional Tracking Generator
41.5GHz to 26.5Hz
4Modes: Real Time, Swept, VSA, EMI, VNA
4Optional Tracking Generator
ONLY $
799
FROM $
ex GST
1,321
FROM $
ex GST
3,210
ex GST
Buy on-line at www.emona.com.au/rigol
Sydney
Tel 02 9519 3933
Fax 02 9550 1378
Melbourne
Tel 03 9889 0427
Fax 03 9889 0715
email testinst<at>emona.com.au
Brisbane
Tel 07 3392 7170
Fax 07 3848 9046
Adelaide
Tel 08 8363 5733
Fax 08 83635799
Perth
Tel 08 9361 4200
Fax 08 9361 4300
web www.emona.com.au
EMONA
|